O  R^G  6iS  E  RAl  0  F  RAli  R  O 


FOR  THE  GOVERNMENT 


RATING  DEPARTMENT 


leaving  the  service. 


UNITED  STATES  RAILROAD  ADMINISTRATION 

DIRECTOR  GENERAL  OF  RAILROADS 
HICAGO  AND  NORTH  WESTERN  RAILROAD 


RULES 

FOR  THE  GOVERNMENT 

OF  THE 

OPERATING  DEPARTMENT 


TO  TAKE   EFFECT  JUNE  1,  1919 


ISSUED  IN  ACCORDANCE  WITH  THE  STANDARD  CODE 

ADOPTED  BY 

THE  AMERICAN  RAILWAY  ASSOCIATION 
NOVEMBER  17,  1915. 


The  rules  herein  set  forth  govern  the  railroads 
operated  by  the  Chicago  &  North  Western  Rail- 
road. They  take  effect  June  1, 1919,  superseding 
all  previous  rules  and  instructions  inconsistent 
therewith. 

Special  instructions  may  be  issued  by  proper 
authority. 


Approved: 


General  Manager 


Federal  Manager 


GENERAL  NOTICE 

Safety  is  of  the  first  importance  in  the  discharge 
of  duty. 

Obedience  to  the  rules  is  essential  to  safety. 

To  enter  or  remain  in  the  service  is  an  assurance 
of  willingness  to  obey  the  rules. 

The  service  demands  the  faithful,  intelligent 
and  courteous  discharge  of  duty. 

To  obtain  promotion  capacity  must  be  shown 
for  greater  responsibility. 

In  case  of  doubt  adopt  the  safe  course. 

Speed  must  always  be  sacrificed  for  safety. 


GENERAL  RULES. 

A.  Employes  whose  duties  are  prescribed  by 
these  rules  must  provide  themselves  with  a  copy. 

Employes  whose  duties  are  in  any  way  affected 
by  the  time-table  must  have  a  copy  of  the  current 
time-table  with  them  while  on  duty. 

B.  Employes  must   be   conversant  with   and 
obey  the  rules  and  special  instructions.     If  in 
doubt  as  to  their  meaning  they  must  apply  to 
proper  authority  for  an  explanation. 

C.  Employes  must  pass  the  required  examina- 
tions. 

D.  Persons  employed  in  any  service  on  trains 
are  subject  to  the  rules  and  special  instructions* 

E.  Employes  must  render  every  assistance  in 
their  power  in  carrying  out  the  rules  and  special 
instructions    and    must    report    to    the    proper 
official  any  violation  thereof. 

F.  Accidents,  detention  of  trains,  failure  in  the 
supply  of  water  or  fuel,  or  defects  in  the  track, 
bridges  or  signals,  must  be  promptly  reported 
by  wire  to  the  proper  official. 

G.  The  use  of  intoxicants  by  employes  while  on 
duty  is  prohibited.     Their  use,  or  the  frequenting 
of  places  where  they  are  sold,  is  sufficient  cause 
for  dismissal. 

H.  The  use  of  tobacco  by  employes  while  on 
duty  in  or  about  passenger  stations,  or  on  pas- 
senger cars,  is  prohibited. 


.  J.  Employes,  •  on  duty  must  wear  the  pre- 
,'^(jribe$i  badge  and  uniform  and  be  neat  in  ap- 
pearance. 

K.  Employes  and  others  authorized  to  transact 
business  at  stations  or  on  or  about  trains  must  be 
orderly  and  avoid  annoyance  to  patrons. 

L.  In  case  of  danger  to  the  Company's  property 
employes  must  unite  to  protect  it. 

M.  Every  employe  must  keep  the  premises 
subject  to  his  control  neat  and  cleanly,  and  must 
take  every  precaution  to  guard  against  loss  or 
damage  by  fire. 

N.  Minors  must  not  be  employed  without 
proper  release  from  parents  or  guardians. 

0.  The  assignment  of  wages  is  prohibited.  The 
attaching  of  an  employe's  wages  by  garnishment 
process,  due  to  the  employe's  fault,  or  proceed- 
ings in  aid  of  executions,  will  be  considered 
sufficient  cause. for  dismissal. 


DEFINITIONS. 

ENGINE. — A  locomotive  propelled  by  any  form 
of  energy. 

MOTOR. — A  car  propelled  by  any  form  of 
energy. 

TRACK  CAR. — Any  car  which  may  be  moved 
manually  off  or  on  track  and  may  be  a  push  car, 
speeder  car,  hand  car,  gang  car,  or  motor  car. 

TRAIN. — An  engine,  or  motor,  or  more  than 
one  engine,  or  motor,  coupled,  with  or  without 
cars,  displaying  markers. 

REGULAR  TRAIN. — A  train  authorized  by  a 
time-table  schedule. 

SECTION. — One  of  two  or  more  trains  running 
on  the  same  schedule  displaying  signals  or  for 
which  signals  are  displayed. 

EXTRA  TRAIN. — A  train  not  authorized  by  a 
time-table  schedule.     It  may  be  designated  as — 
Extra — for  any  extra  train,   except  work 

extra; 
Work  extra — for  work  train  extra. 

SUPERIOR  TRAIN. — A  train  having  precedence 
over  another  train. 

TRAIN  OF  SUPERIOR  RIGHT. — A  train  given 
precedence  by  train  order. 

TRAIN  OF  SUPERIOR  CLASS. — A  train  given 
precedence  by  time-table. 

TRAIN  OF  SUPERIOR  DIRECTION. — A  train  given 
precedence  in  the  direction  specified  by  time- 
table as  between  opposing  trains  of  the  same 
class. 


TIME-TABLE. — The  authority  for  the  movement 
of  regular  trains  subject  to  the  rules.  It  con- 
tains the  classified  schedules  of  trains  with 
special  instructions  relating  thereto. 

SCHEDULE. — That  part  of  a  time-table  which 
prescribes  class,  direction,  number  and  move- 
ment for  a  regular  train. 

DIVISION. — That  portion  of  a  railroad  assigned 
to  the  supervision  of  a  superintendent. 

SUBDIVISION. — A  portion  of  a  division  desig- 
nated by  time-table. 

MAIN  TRACK. — A  track  extending  through 
yards  and  between  stations,  upon  which  trains 
are  operated  by  time-table  or  train  order,  or  both, 
or  the  use  of  which  is  governed  by  block  signals. 

SINGLE  TRACK. — A  main  track  upon  which 
trains  are  operated  in  both  directions. 

DOUBLE  TRACK. — Two  main  tracks,  upon  one 
of  which  the  current  of  traffic  is  in  a  specified 
direction,  and  upon  the  other  in  the  opposite 
direction. 

THREE  OR  MORE  TRACKS. — Three  or  more  main 
tracks,  upon  any  of  which  the  current  of  traffic 
may  be  in  either  specified  direction. 

CURRENT  OF  TRAFFIC.  —  The  movement  of 
trains  on  a  main  track,  in  one  direction,  specified 
by  the  rules. 

STATION. — A  place  designated  on  the  time- 
table by  name,  at  which  a  train  may  stop  for 
traffic;  or  to  enter  or  leave  the  main  track;  or 
from  which  fixed  signals  are  operated. 


SIDING. — A  track  auxiliary  to  the  main  track 
for  meeting  or  passing  trains. 

FIXED  SIGNAL. — A  signal  of  fixed  location 
indicating  a  condition  affecting  the  movement 
of  a  train.* 

YARD. — A  system  of  tracks  within  defined 
limits  provided  for  the  making  up  of  trains, 
storing  of  cars  and  other  purposes,  over  which 
movements  not  authorized  by  time-table,  or  by 
train  order,  may  be  made,  subject  to  prescribed 
signals  and  rules,  or  special  instructions. 

YARD  ENGINE. — An  engine  assigned  to  yard 
service  and  working  within  yard  limits. 

PILOT. — An  employe  assigned  to  a  train  when 
the  engineman  or  conductor,  or  both,  are  not 
fully  acquainted  with  the  physical  characteristics 
or  rules  of  the  railroad,  or  portion  of  the  railroad, 
over  which  the  train  is  to  be  moved. 

TRAIN  REGISTER. — A  book  or  form  which  may 
be  used  at  designated  stations  for  registering 
signals  displayed,  the  time  of  arrival  and  de- 
parture of  trains  and  such  other  information  as 
may  be  prescribed. 


*NOTE  TO  DEFINITION  OF  FIXED  SIGNAL. — The  definition  of  a  "Fixed 
Signal"  covers  such  signals  as  slow  boards,  stop  boards,  yard  limits, 
switch,  train  order,  block,  interlocking,  semaphore,  disc,  ball  or  other 
means  for  displaying  indications  that  govern  the  movement  of  a  train. 


TRAIN  RULES. 


NOTE. — In  the  train  rules  for  double  track, 
those  marked  "D,"  such  as  rule  D-5,  rule  D-17, 
etc.,  either  differ  in  language  from  the  correspond- 
ing rule  (rule  5,  rule  17,  etc.)  of  the  rules  for 
single  track;  or  are  rules  used  only  for  double 
track,  as  rule  D-151,  etc.  Rules  having  simple 
numbers  such  as  rule  1,  rule  2,  etc.,  are  the  same 
for  both  single  and  double  track. 


10 


STANDARD  TIME. 

1.  Standard  time  obtained  from  United  States  standard 
Observatory  will   be  transmitted  to  all   points 
from   designated   offices   at   ten   o'clock   a.   m., 
central  time,  daily. 

2.  Watches    that    have    been    examined    and  watches 
certified  to  by  a  designated  inspector  must  be™ 
used  by  train  dispatchers,  road  foremen  of  engines, 
enginemen,  firemen,  conductors,  flagmen,  brake- 
men,    yard-masters,    yard-engine    foremen,    and 
such  employes  as  may  be  designated  by  special 
instructions. 

The   certificate   in  prescribed  form   must   b^ 
renewed    and    filed    with    local    watch-inspector c 
every  three  months. 

2a.  In  addition  to  the  quarterly  examination  of  weekly 

,  ,  ,  •          i  i          i     •  inspection. 

watches  a  weekly  inspection  by  a  local  inspector 
is  required. 

(Form  of  Certificate.) 

CERTIFICATE    OF   WATCH    INSPECTOR. 

This  is  to  certify  that  on . .  ..  19 ....  Form  °f 

certificate. 

the  watch  of 

employed  as 

on  the  Chicago  &  North  Western  Railroad,  was  examined 
by  me.  It  is  correct  and  reliable,  and,  with  proper  care, 
should  run  within  a  variation  of  thirty  seconds  per  week. 

Name  of  maker 

Grade 

Number  of  movement 

Open  or  hunting  case 

Metal  of  case 

Signed, 

Inspector. 

Address , 

11 


+  FAST        -  SLOW       0  RUN  DOWN 
D  STOPPED         []SET      ()      REGULATED 

Date 
19... 

Set 
Fast  or 
Slow 

Why 
Set  or 
Regu'd 

Daily 
Rate 
Sec. 

Inspector 
fill  out  and  sign 
with  ink 



This  card  must  be  presented  to  some  one  of  the 
company's  watch  inspectors  each  week,  who  will 
note  the  running  of  the  watch.    Preserve  this  card, 
as  it  will  be  taken  up  and  a  new  one  issued  at  the 
next  inspection. 

Comparison 
of  watches. 


Comparison 

between 

Trainmen. 


3.  Watches  of  conductors  and  enginemen 
must  be  compared  befofe  commencing  each  day's 
work,  with  a  clock  designated  by  time-table  as  a 
standard  clock.  The  time  when  watches  are 
compared  must  be  registered  on  a  prescribed 
form. 

3a.  After  obtaining  standard  time,  conductors 
and  enginemen  must  compare  time  with  each 
other  before  starting  on  each  trip,  or  commenc- 
ing the  day's  work.  Conductors  will  also 


12 


compare  time  with  their  trainmen   and  engine- 
men  with  their  firemen. 

36.  Conductors,  enginemen,  yard-masters  and  TJ™^  g 
yard-foremen  who  have  not  access  to  a  standard  patcher- 
clock  will  obtain  correct  time  from   the  train 
dispatcher  daily,  before  commencing  their  work. 


13 


TIME-TABLES. 

SSI^utbfes.  Employes  concerned  in  the  movement  of 
trains  must  provide  themselves  with  a  copy  of  the 
current  time-table  and  acknowledge  receipt  of 
same  to  the  division  superintendent  through  the 
several  department  heads,  and  through  whom 
they  will  be  furnished. 

umeiretabies.  ^U  expired  time-tables,  after  comparison  with 
the  new  time-table,  must  be  destroyed. 

Smekta°bfies  ^  w^  ^e  ^e  duty  of  the  chief  train  dis- 
patcher to  know  that  each  conductor  and  engine- 
man  before  commencing  a  trip,  is  provided  with 
a  copy  of  the  current  time-table. 

£  tables  4.  Each  time-table,  from  the  moment  it  takes 
effect,  supersedes  the  preceding  time-table,  and 
its  schedules  take  effect  on  any  division,  or  sub- 
division, at  the  leaving  time  at  their  initial 
stations  on  such  division,  or  subdivision.  But 
when  a  schedule  of  the  preceding  time-table 
corresponds  in  number,  class,  day  of  leaving, 
direction,  and  initial  and  terminal  stations  with 
•  a  schedule  of  the  new  time-table,  a  train  author- 
ized by  the  preceding  time-table  will  retain  its 
train  orders  and  assume  the  schedule  of  the 
corresponding  number  of  the  new  time-table. 

Time  tables      Schedules    on   each   division,    or   subdivision, 

take  effect.  .     .    . 

date  from  their  initial  stations  on  such  division, 
or  subdivision. 

Not  more  than  one  schedule  of  the  same  num- 
ber and  day  shall  be  in  effect  on  any  division,  or 
subdivision. 

14 


4a.  The  days  on  which  trains  are  due  to  leave  i>ays 

trains  run. 

and  arrive  at  their  terminal  stations  on  each  sub- 
division are  indicated  by  schedules. 

46.  Special  rules  in  a  time-table  expire  with  the  Bp«aai 
time-table  in  which  they  are  contained. 

5.  Not  more  than  two  times  are  given  for  aTimes  at 

0  stations. 

train  at  any  station;  where  one  is  given,  it  is, 
unless  otherwise  indicated,  the  leaving  time; 
where  two,  they  are  the  arriving  and  the  leaving 
time. 

The  time  applies  to  the  switch  where  an  inferior  where 
train  enters  the  siding;  where  there  is  no  siding  applies- 
it  applies  to  the  place  from  which  fixed  signals 
are  operated;  where  there  is  neither  siding  nor 
fixed  signal,  it  applies  to  the  place  where  traffic 
is  received  or  discharged. 

Schedule    meeting    or    passing    stations    are  Fuii-faced 
indicated  by  figures  in  full-faced  type. 

Both  the  arriving  and  leaving  time  of  a  train 
are  in  full-faced  type  when  both  are  meeting  or 
passing  times,  or  when  one  or  more  trains  are  to 
meet  or  pass  it  between  those  times. 

When  trains  are  to  be  met  or  passed  at  a  siding 
extending  between  two  adjoining  stations,  the 
time  at  each  end  of  the  siding  will  be  shown 
in  full-faced  type. 

6.  The  following  signs  when  placed  before  the  schedule 
figures  of  the  schedule  indicate: 

"  s ' ' — regular  stop ; 

"f» — flag  gtop  to  receive    or    discharge  pas- 
sengers or  freight; 
"L"— leave; 
"A" — arrive. 

15 


6a.  When  placed  before  the  figures  of  the 
schedule  the  following  will  indicate: 

"M"— meals. 

"N"— luncheon. 

-Other  letters  will  indicate  flag  stops  as  specified 
by  time  table. 

The  following  signs  when  placed  elsewhere 
indicate: 

"F"    —fuel; 

"W"  —water. 

«TT"— turntable; 

«Y"  —wye; 

"CS" — communicating  station. 


SIGNALS. 

7.  Employes  whose  duties  may  require  them 
£o  gjve  signals,  must  provide  themselves  with  the 
proper  appliances,  keep  them  in  good  order  and 
ready  for  immediate  use. 

use  of  f/  la.  Employes  giving  signals  must  locate  them- 
selves so  as  to  be  plainly  seen,  and  make  them  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  be  readily  understood.  The 
utmost  care  must  be  used  to  avoid  taking  a 
wrong  signal  and  unless  positive  a  signal  is  for 
them  will  not  accept  it  until  advised  verbally. 
When  signals  from  a  trainman  cannot  be  seen, 
train  must  be  stopped  immediately. 

Flags  and  8.  Flags  of  the  prescribed  color  must  be  used 
by  day,  and  lights  of  the  prescribed  color  by 
night. 

16 


9.  Day  signals  must  be  displayed  from  sunrise 
to  sunset,  but  when  day  signals  cannot  be  plainly 
seen,  night  signals  must  be  used  in  addition. 

Night  signals  must  be  displayed  from  sunset  to 
sunrise. 

10.  COLOR  SIGNALS 


COLOR 

INDICATION 

(a)   Red. 
/T^  j  Green  and  red. 
(b)  \  Yellow. 

Stop. 
Proceed    with    caution,    and 
other   uses    prescribed   by 
Rules. 

for 
the 

(c)    Green. 

(d)   Green  and  white  . 
(e)    Blue. 

Proceed,  and  for  other  uses 
scribed  by  the  Rules. 
Flag  stop.     See  Rule  28. 
See  Rule  26. 

pre- 

100.     A  white  light  may  be  used  in  the  marker  Marker 
on  upper  quadrant  signals. 

Wh.  A  caution  signal  placed  near  the  track, 
indicates  that  trains  must  proceed  at  slow  speed 
prepared  to  stop  until  a  proceed  signal  is  reached. 
On  single  track  these  signals  will  be  placed  to 
the  right  of  the  track,  and  on  double  track 
to  the  left  of  the  track  in  the  direction  of 
current  of  traffic. 

11.  A  train  finding  a  fusee  burning  on  or  near  Fus 
its  track  must  stop  and  extinguish  the  fusee,  and 
then  proceed  with  caution  prepared  to  stop  short 
of  train  or  obstruction. 

lla.  Passenger  trains  need  not  extinguish 
fusees. 

17 


12.      HAND,  FLAG  AND  LAMP  SIGNALS 

NOTE— The  hand,  or  a  flag,  moved  the  same  as  the  lamp,  as  illustrated 
in  the  following  diagrams,  gives  the  same  indication. 


MANNER  OP  USING 

INDICATION 

DIAGRAM 

(a)-  Swung-  across  the 
track. 

V  Stop. 

M 

E£ 

(6)  Held  horizontally  at 
arm's  length  when 
the  train  is  moving. 

)  Reduce 
f  Speed. 

ri 

fm 

11 
f 

li 

>^ 

(c)  Raised  and  lowered 
vertically. 

>•  Proceed. 

Mir 

I 

H 

B^ 

18 


MANNER  OF  USING 

INDICATION 

DIAGRAM 

(d)  Swung  vertically  in 

a  circle  at  half-arm's 

) 

O-A  •-.. 

\4 

length    across     the 

>•  Back. 

x  

track  when  the  train 

J 

is  standing. 

^ 

y 

i 

Swung  vertically  in 
a  circle  at  arm's 
length  across  the 
track  when  the  t.rain 
is  running. 


Swung  horizontally 
above  the  head 
when  the  train  is 
standing. 


Train 

has 

part-    \     \ 

ed. 


Apply 

air 

brakes. 


19 


MANNER  OF  USING 

INDICATION 

DIAGRAM 

(g)  Held  at  arm's  length 
above  the  head  when 

}  Release 

| 

the  train  is  standing. 

air  brakes 

1    0  JLJ 

I 

13.  Any  object  waved  violently  by  any  one  on 
or  near  the  track  is  a  signal  to  stop. 


20 


14.  ENGINE  AND  MOTOR  WHISTLE  SIGNALS. 

NOTE. — The    signals    prescribed  are  illustrated  by  "o"  for  short 

sounds;  " "  for  longer  sounds.     The  sound  of  the  whistle  should 

be  distinct,  with  intensity  and  duration  proportionate  to  the  distance 
signal  is  to  be  conveyed. 


SOUND 


INDICATION 


(a)   o 

00  —    - 

(c)    —     ooo 


to)  o    o 

(h)   o     o     o 


(j)    o     o    o    o 
(k)   —    o    o 


Apply  brakes.  Stop. 
Release  brakes.     Proceed. 

Flagman  protect  rear  of 
train. 

Flagman  may  return  from 
west,  as  prescribed  by 
Rule  99. 

Flagman  may  return  from 
east,  as  prescribed  by 
Rule  99. 

When  running,  train  parted; 
to  be  repeated  until  an- 
swered by  the  signal  pre- 
scribed by  Rule  12   (e). 
Answer  to  12  (e). 

Answer  to  any  signal  not 
otherwise  provided  for. 

When  train  is  standing,  back. 
Answer  to  12  (d)  and  16 
(c).  When  train  is  run- 
ning, answer  to  16  (d). 

Call  for  signals. 

To  call  the  attention  of  yard 
engines,  extra  trains  or 
trains  of  the  same  or  in- 
ferior class  or  inferior  right 
to  signals  displayed  for  a 
following  section. 

If  not  answered  by  a  train, 
the  train  displaying  signals 
must  stop  and  ascertain 
the  cause. 


21 


SOUND 


(0   —    —    o     o 


(m) 


(n)  —    —    o 

(o)    o     — 

(p)   Succession   of   short 
sounds. 


D-14. 
(*)  - 


o    o 


INDICATION 


Approaching  public  cross- 
ings at  grade  and  overhead, 
and  curves  where  view  is 
obscured. 

Approaching  stations,  junc- 
tions, railroad  crossings  at 
grade,  intermediate  block 
stations  and  mail  cranes. 

Approaching  meeting  points. 
See  Rule  90. 

Inspect  train  line  for  leak. 

Alarm  for  persons  or  live 
stock  on  the  track. 


To  call  the  attention  of 
yard  engines  or  of  trains 
moving  in  the  same  di- 
rection to  signals  dis- 
played for  a  following 
section. 

If  not  answered  by  a  train, 
the  train  displaying  sig- 
nals must  stop  and  as- 
certain the  cause. 


14q.   The  duration  and  interval  between  sounds 


Duration 
of    whistle 

sounds.        must  be  as  follows: 


Answering 
signals. 


(1)  o       Duration  one  second. 

(2)  —    Duration  two  seconds. 

(3)  Duration  four  seconds. 

(4)  Interval  between  sounds  one  second. 

14r.  Should  a  train  on  single  track  or  at  end  of 
double  track  fail  to  answer  whistle  signal  14  (k)  as 
provided,  the  train  displaying  the  signals  will 
report  the  fact  to  the  superintendent  from  the 
first  communicating  office. 


22 


15.  The  explosion  of  two  torpedoes  is  a  signal  Torpedoes. 
to  reduce  speed  and  look  out  for  a  train  ahead  or 
obstruction.     The  explosion  of  one  torpedo  will 
indicate  the  same  as  two,  but  the  use  of  two  is 
required. 


16. 


COMMUNICATING  SIGNALS 


NOTE. — The  signals  prescribed  are  illustrated  by  "o"  for  short 
sounds;  " "  for  longer  sounds. 


SOUND 

INDICATION 

(a) 
(6) 
<e) 
(d) 

(«) 

O  O 

o  o 
o  o  o 

000 

o  o  o  o 

When  standing  —  start. 
When  running  —  stop  at  once. 
When  standing  —  back  the  train. 
When  running  —  stop  at  next 
passenger  station. 
When  standing  —  apply  or  re- 
lease air  brakes. 

(/) 
(9) 

0000 

o  o  o  o  o 

When  running  —  reduce  speed. 
When    standing  —  recall    flag- 
man. 

(V 
0) 

(D 

00000 

o  o  o  o  o  o 

When  running  —  increase  speed. 
When  running  —  increase  train 
heat. 
When  running  —  look  back  for 
hand  signals. 
When  approaching  terminal  — 
shut  off  steam  heat. 

o  o  o  o  o  o  o 

(m) 

Continuous. 

When  running  —  brakes  stick  or 
wheels  slide. 

17.  The  headlight  will  be  displayed  to  the  Headlight, 
front  of  every  train  by  night,  but  must  be  con- 
cealed when  a  train  turns  out  to  meet  another  and 
has  stopped  clear  of  main  track,  or  is  standing  to 
meet  trains  at  the  end  of  double  track  or  at 
junctions. 

23 


When  an  engine  is  running  backward  a  white 
light  must  be  displayed  by  night  on  the  rear  of 
the  tender. 

(See  diagram.) 

l^a.  When  a  train  heads  into  a  siding  to  clear 
the  main  track  and  for  any  reason  its  headlight 
cannot  be  seen  by  an  opposing  train,  or  when 
using  an  impaired  or  defective  headlight,  the 
movement  must  be  protected  by  a  flagman  until 
the  main  track  is  clear. 

he°audbil|htrack  D'17-  The  headlight  will  be  displayed  to  the 
front  of  every  train  by  night,  but  must  be  con- 
cealed when  a  train  is  standing  to  meet  trains  at 
the  end  of  double  track  or  at  junctions.  When  an 
engine  is  running  backward  a  white  light  must  be 
displayed  by  night  on  the  rear  of  the  tender. 

(See  diagram.) 

g^tehts  is.  Yard  engines  will  display  the  headlight  to 
the  front  and  rear  by  night.  When  not  provided 
with  a  headlight  at  the  rear,  a  white  light  must 
be  displayed.  Yard  engines  will  not  display 
markers. 

Markers.  19-     The  following   signals   will  be  displayed, 

one  on  each  side  of  the  rear  of  every  train,  as 
markers,  to  indicate  the  rear  of  the  train:  By 
day,  marker  lamps,  not  lighted  on  passenger 
trains,  green  flags  on  other  trains:  By  night, 
green  lights  to  the  front  and  side  and  red  lights 
to  the  rear;  except  when  the  train  is  clear  of  the 
main  track,  when  green  lights  must  be  displayed 
to  the  front,  side  and  rear. 

24 


I/    19a.  When  a  car  is  hauled  behind  a  caboose  Markers 

behind 

the   required   signals   used   as   markers  will   be caboose- 
shown  on  the  caboose  and  in  addition,  a  green 
flag  by  day  and  a  red  light  by  night,  will  be 
displayed  on  the  rear  of  the  last  car. 

(See  diagrams.) 

19&.  On  arrival  at  terminals,  signals  used  as  Removing 

markers. 

markers  must  not  be  removed  until  the  tram  has 
been  delivered  to  the  yard  men,  or  placed  clear 
of  main  track. 

19c.     Train  indicators  upon  cabooses  will  show  Train 
schedule  number,  thus:   "N°.  119;"  if  sections 
"1-119,"  "2-119,"  or  succeeding  sections,  and  the 
last  section  "Ll  119." 

If  an  extra  train,  they  will  show  the  letter 
"X"  and  engine  number,  thus:  "X1592." 

When  more  than  one  engine  on  an  extra  train, 
the  number  of  the  leading  engine  only,  will  be 
shown. 

D-19.  The  following  signals  will  be  displayed,  Doubie  track 
one  on  each  side  of  the  rear  of  every  train,  as  mark-  markers- 
ers,  to  indicate  the  rear  of  the  train:  By  day, 
marker  lamps  not  lighted  on  passenger  trains, 
green  flags  on  other  trains:  By  night,  green  lights 
to  the  front  and  side  and  red  lights  to  the  rear; 
except  when  the  train  is  clear  of  the  main  track, 
Then  green  lights  must  be  displayed  to  the  front, 
side  and  rear,  and  except  when  a  train  is  turned  out 
against  the  current  of  traffic,  when  green  lights 
must  be  displayed  to  the  front  and  side,  a  green 
light  to  the  rear  on  the  side  next  to  the  main  track 
on  which  the  current  of  traffic  is  in  the  direction 
the  train  is  moving,  and  a  red  light  to  the  rear  on 
the  opposite  side. 

(See  diagrams.) 

25 


is      ^0.  All  sections,  except  the  last,  will  display 
sections.       ^wo  green  flags  an(j  }n  addition,  two  green  lights 
by  night,  in  the  places  provided  for  that  purpose 
on  the  front  of  the  engine. 

(See  diagrams.) 
classification     21.  Extra  trains  will  display  two  white  flags 

signals, 

and,  in  addition,  two  white  lights  by  night,  in 
the  places  provided  for  that  purpose  on  the  front 
of  the  engine. 

(See  diagrams.) 
Double       //  22.  When-  two  or  more  engines  are  coupled, 

header    clas-^  ° 

lSn!ison      each   engine   shall   display   the   signals   as   pre- 
scribed by  Rules  20  and  21. 

r/     22a.  When  the  leading  engine  is  detached  the 

signals  on  that  engine  must  be  removed  at  once. 

when  but        23.  One  flag  or  light  displayed  where  in  Rules 

one   signal.  J  . 

19,  20  and  21  two  are  prescribed  will  indicate  the 
same  as  two;  but  the  proper  display  of  all  train 
signals  is  required. 
Transferring      23a.  When  the  schedule  of  a  train  is  to  be  trans- 

schedules. 

ferred  from  one  crew  to  another  at  an  intermedi- 
ate junction  or  station,  or  at  a  point  not  the  usual 
place  of  making  such  transfer,  the  waiting  crew 
must  not  display  identification  signals  or  markers 
until  after  the  arrival  of  the  train  using  the 
schedule, 
cars  pushed  24.  When  cars  are  pushed  by  an  engine,  ex- 

by   engine.  r  °         J 

cept  when  shifting  or  making  up  trains  in  yards, 
a  white  light  must  be  displayed  on  the  front  of 
the  leading  car  by  night. 

(See  diagrams.)  Jf  2J 

26          ^    / 


25.  Each  car  on  a  passenger  train  must  be 
connected  with  the  engine  by  a  communicating 
signal  appliance. 

26.  A  blue  signal,  displayed  at  one  or  both  ends 
of  an  engine,  car  or  train,  indicates  that  workmen 
are  under  or  about  it;  when  thus  protected  it 
must  not  be  coupled  to  or  moved.     Workmen 
will  display  the  blue  signals  and  the  same  work- 
men are  alone  authorized  to  remove  them.     Other 
cars  must  not  be  placed  on  the  same  track  so  as 
to  intercept  the  view  of  the  blue  signals,  without 
first  notifying  the  workmen. 

26a.  When  repair  work  is  to  be  done  under  Repairs  by 

Trainmen. 

or  about  cars  by  trainmen,  a  flagman  may  take 
the  place  of  the  blue  signal;  Engineman  and 
Fireman  must  be  notified. 

Passenger     train    inspection    made    at    inter- Passenger 
mediate  terminals,  where  engines  are  changed,  ^ection- 
only  exterior  inspection  will   be  done  without 
the  use  of  blue  signals,  but  as  soon  as  repairs  are 
found  necessary,   and  before  being  done,   blue 
signals  will  be  placed  ahead  of  the  train  between 
the  rails,  and  high  enough  to  be  seen  by  the 
engineman;  blue  signals  will  also  be  placed  to  the 
rear  of  the  train  between  the  rails. 

At  engine  changing  terminals  where  inspection  changing 
of  passenger  trains  is  made,  the  train  must  not  be  te™^**s. 
moved  until  released  by  inspector  to  conductor. 

Freight    train    inspection    will    be   made    on  Freight 
arrival  of  trains  and  before  they  are  switched,  s 
This  will  consist  of  ordinary  running  inspection 

27 


and  light  running  repairs.  The  train  must  first 
be  protected  at  both  ends  by  blue  signals,  and 
must  not  be  moved  until  released  by  the  in- 
spector. 

In  making  inspection  and  light  running  repairs 
the  blue  signals  must  be  placed  one  rail  length,  or 
not  less  than  thirty  (30)  feet  distant  from  each  end 
of  the  train,  and  always  inside  of  frog  clearance  of 
the  track  where  protection  is  required. 

^  tracks  regularly  or  temporarily  assigned  to 
repair  of  cars  must  be  protected  for  such  use  by  a 
blue  signal  placed  at  each  end,  and  in  addition 
the  switches  must  be  locked. 

Blue  signals,  In  placing  blue  signals  on  assigned  tracks,  they 
will  be  placed  between  the  rails  at  the  switch  end 
of  a  spur  track,  and  at  each  end  of  a  double  end 
track,  and  always  inside  of  the  frog  clearance  of 
the  track  where  protection  is  required. 

When  switches  to  tracks  regularly  or  tempo- 
rarily  assigned  to  the  repair  of  cars  cannot 
be  locked,  or  other  positive  protection  secured 
without  interfering  with  switching  movements, 
a  hand-operated  derail  should  be  installed. 

The  standard  blue  signal  flag  will  be  of 
metal,  with  forked  end,  mounted  on  a  single 
standard  and  used  at  all  points,  except  when 
men  are  sent  to  an  intermediate  station,  a  cloth 
flag  may  be  used. 

protecting  266.  When  work  or  outfit  cars  are  placed  on  a 
siding  or  passing  track  for  so  short  a  time  that 
will  not  justify  the  cutting  of  the  track,  they  will 
be  protected  as  follows: 

28 


The  man  in  charge  of  such  cars  will  see  that 
a  white  flag  by  day  and  in  addition  a  white 
light  by  night  is  fastened  to  each  end  of  cars 
needing  protection,  and  on  both  sides,  so  that 
they  can  be  plainly  seen.  Other  cars  must  not  be 
placed  on  such  tracks  that  will  obstruct  the  view 
of  these  protected  cars.  This  will  not  relieve 
conductors  and  trainmen  from  responsibility 
when  using  these  tracks. 


29 


DIAGRAMS  OF  TRAIN  SIGNALS 


i i 

D 
DD 


] —        — r 


I—REAR  OF  PASSENGER  TRAIN  BY  DAY. 

See  Rules  19  and  .#-19. 


2-REAR  OF  TRAIN  BY  NIGHT  WHILE  RUNNING. 

See  Rules  19  and  /M9. 

30 


(Between  track 


(Outside) 


3  — REAR  OF  TRAIN  BY  NIGHT  RUNNING  AGAINST 
THE  CURRENT  OF  TRAFFIC. 

See  Rule  Z>-19. 


(Outside) 


(Between  tracks) 


4  —  REAR  OF  TRAIN  BY  NIGHT  RUNNING  WITH  THE 
CURRENT  OF  TRAFFIC  ON  A  LOCAL  TRACK. 

See  Rule  ^F-273,  second  paragraph. 

31 


5-  REAR  OF  TRAIN  BY  NIGHT  WHEN  ON  SIDING 
TO  BE  PASSED  BY  ANOTHER  TRAIN. 

See  Rules  19  and 


V 


6-  REAR  OF  TRAIN  BY  NIGHT  RUNNING  WITH  THE  CURRENT 
OF  TRAFFIC  ON  AN  EXPRESS  TRACK. 

See  Rule  ^P-273.  first  paragraph. 

32 


7-  REAR  OF  TRAIN  BY  NIGHT  RUNNING  ON  ANY  TRACK 
AGAINST  THE  CURRENT  OF  TRAFFIC. 

See  Rule  -F-273,  third  paragraph. 


8-  PASSENGER  CARS  BEING  PUSHED  BY  AN  ENGINE 
BY  NIGHT. 

White  light  on  front  of  leading  car. 
See  Rule  24. 

33 


9-REAR  OF  FREIGHT  TRAIN  BY  DAY. 

See  Rules  19  and  Z>-19. 


34 


0     rtP^S" 


10—  FREIGHT  CARS  BEING  PUSHED  BY  AN  ENGINE 
BY  NIGHT. 

See  Rule  24. 


(REAR  or  TENDE*  ) 


11—  ENGINE  RUNNING  BACKWARD  BY  NIGHT,  WITHOUT  CARS  OR  AT 
THE  FRONT  OF  A  TRAIN  PULLING  CARS. 

See  Rules  17  and  -D-17. 


35 


12—  ENGINE  RUNNING  FORWARD  BY  DAY  DISPLAYING 
SIGNALS  FOR  A  FOLLOWING  SECTION. 

See  Rule  20. 


13—  ENGINE  RUNNING  FORWARD  BY  NIGHT  DISPLAYING 
SIGNALS  FOR  A  FOLLOWING  SECTION. 

See  Rule  20. 

36 


ENGINE  RUNNING  BACKWARD  BY  DAY,  WITHOUT  CARS  OR  AT  THE 
REAR  OF  A  TRAIN  PUSHING  CARS,  AND  DISPLAYING 
SIGNALS  FOR  A  FOLLOWING  SECTION. 

See  Rules  19,  /M9  and  20. 


15—  ENGINE  RUNNING  BACKWARD  BY  NIGHT,  WITHOUT  CARS  OR  AT  THE 

REAR  OF  A  TRAIN  PUSHING  CARS,  AND  DISPLAYING 

SIGNALS  FOR  A  FOLLOWING  SECTION. 

See  Rules  19,  -D-19  and  20. 

37 


16-ENGINE  RUNNING  FORWARD  BY  DAY  AS  AN  EXTRA  TRAIN. 

See  Rule  21. 


17-ENGINE  RUNNING  FORWARD  BY  NIGHT  AS  AN  EXTRA  TRAIN. 

See  Rule  21. 

38 


18-  ENGINE  RUNNING  BACKWARD  BY  DAY  AS  AN  EXTRA  TRAIN; 
WITHOUT  CARS  OR  AT  THE  REAR  OF  A  TRAIN  PUSHING  CARS. 

See  Rules  19.  Z>-19  and  21. 


9-  ENGINE  RUNNING  BACKWARD  BY  NIGHT  AS  AN  EXTRA  TRAIN. 
WITHOUT  CARS  OR  AT  THE  REAR  OF  A  TRAIN  PUSHING  CARS. 

See  Rules  19.  Z>-19  and  21. 

39 


20-  ENGINE  RUNNING  FORWARD  BY  DAY,  WITHOUT  CARS  OR  AT 
THE  REAR  OF  A  TRAIN  PUSHING  CARS. 

See  Rules  19  and  -O-19. 


(**** 


21-  ENGINE  RUNNING  FORWARD  BY  NIGHT,  WITHOUT  CARS  OR  AT 
THE  REAR  OF  A  TRAIN  PUSHING  CARS. 

See  Rules  19  and 


40 


USE  OF  SIGNALS. 

27.  A    signal    imperfectly    displayed,    or    the 
absence  of  a  signal  at  a  place  where  a  signal  is 
usually  shown,  must  be  regarded  as  the  most 
restrictive  indication  that  can  be  given  by  that 
signal,  and  the  fact  reported  to  the  chief   train 
dispatcher.     Conductors  and  enginemen  using  a 
switch  where  the  switch  light  is  imperfectly  dis- 
played or  absent,  must  also,  if  practicable,  correct 
or  replace  the  light. 

27a.     An  imperfectly  displayed  signal  due  to  imperfectly 

A    .  x  displayed 

a  lamp  not  burning,  may  be  restored  to  normal  si«nals- 
condition  by  train  or  enginemen  relighting  the 
lamp. 

28.  A  green  and  white  signal  will  be  used   to  ^ 
stop  a  train  only  at  the  flag  stations  indicated  on 
its  schedule.     When  it  is  necessary  to  stop  a 
train  at  a  point  that  is  not  a  flag  station  on  its 
schedule,  a  red  signal  must  be  used. 

29.  When  a  signal,  except  a  fixed  signal,  is  given  A^wering 
to  stop  a  train,  it  must,  unless  otherwise  pro- 
vided, be  acknowledged  as  prescribed  by  Rule 

14  (</)  or  (h.) 

30.  The  engine  bell  must  be  rung  when  an  Engine  ben 

to    be   rung. 

engine  is  about  to  move  and  while  approaching 
and  passing  public  crossings  at  grade. 

30a.  The  engine  bell  must  be  rung  upon 
approaching  and  passing  through  all  stations, 
villages  and  cities;  also  on  approaching  tunnels. 

306.  The  engine  bell  must  not  be  rung  onsen  not 
elevated  tracks,  except  when  approaching  and 
leaving  stations  and  in  switching  movements. 

41 


whistle  31.  The  whistle  must  be  sounded  at  all  places 

sounded. 

where  required  by  rule  or  by  law. 

JSt^oSnded  31a.  The  whistle  must  not  be  sounded  while 
passing  a  passenger. train,  or  on  elevated  track, 
except  to  prevent  accident. 

unnecessary      32.  The  unnecessary  use  of  either  the  whistle 

use   of 

signal.         or  ^e  beii  js  prohibited. 

crossing          33.  Watchmen  stationed  at  highway  crossings 

watchmen's  .          .  . 

signals.  must  use  stop  signals  when  necessary  to  stop 
trains4.  They  will  use,  by  day  a  disk  with  the 
word  "STOP"  on  its  face;  and  by  night  a  red 
light,,  visable  only  from  a  highway  as  signals  to 
stop  highway  traffic. 

crossing         33a.   Red  signals  will  be  used  on  all  public 

gate   signals. 

crossing  gates. 

watchmen        33&.    Watchmen  must  provide  themselves  with 
SS2s?B      the   required   signal  equipments  for  protecting 

highway  traffic  over  tracks  and  comply  with  the 

special  rules  governing  their  duties. 
Enginemen       34.  The  engineman  and  fireman  must,  when 
SKnicate  practicable,  communicate  to  each  other  by  its 

name  the  indication  of  all  signals  affecting  the 

movement  of  their  train. 

35.  The   following   signals   will    be    used    by 
SigSens     flagmen: 

Day  signals — A  red  flag, 

Torpedoes  and 
Fusees. 
Night  signals — A  red  light, 

A  white  light, 
Torpedoes  and 
Fusees. 

42 


SUPERIORITY  OF  TRAINS. 

71.  A  train  is  superior  to  another  train  by 
right,  class  or  direction. 

Right  is  conferred  by  train  order;  class  and 
direction  by  time-table. 

Right  is  superior  to  class  or  direction. 

Direction  is  superior  as  between  trains  of  the 
same  class. 

72.  Trains  of  the  first  class  are  superior  to  those 
of  the  second;  trains  of  the  second  class  are 
superior  to  those  of  the  third;  and  so  on. 

Trains  in  the  direction  specified  by  the  time- 
table are  superior  to  trains  of  the  same  class  in 
the  opposite  direction. 

73.  Extra  trains  are  inferior  to  regular  trairis. 


MOVEMENT  OF  TRAINS. 

82.  Time-table  schedules,   unless  fulfilled,  are  schedules 
in  effect  for  twelve  hours  after  their  time  at  each 
station. 

Regular  trains  more  than  twelve  hours  behind 
either  their  schedule  arriving  or  leaving  time  at 
any  station  lose  both  right  and  schedule,  and  can 
thereafter  proceed  only  as  authorized  by  train 
order. 

r83.  A  train  must  not  leave  its  initial  station  Leaving 
terminals. 

on  any  division,  or  subdivision,  or  a  junction,  or 
pass  from  double  to  single  track,  until  it  has  been 

43 


ascertained  whether   all   trains  due,   which   are 

superior,  or  of  the  same  class,  have  arrived  or  left. 

Stations  at  which  train  registers  are  located 

will  be  designated  by  time-table. 

clearance  //  83&.  A  train  must  not  leave  its  initial  station. 

at    term-     " 

or  junction  point  specified  by  time-tables  where 
no    governing   train    order  signal    is    provided, 
without  a  Clearance  Card.    (Form  A  or  A-l.) 
Detouring  $K  836.  When  a  train  is  detoured  over  another 

trains.         pN 

railroad,  it  must  be  governed  by  Rule  83  on 
regaining  its  proper  subdivision  and  before 
assuming  its  schedule,  report  for  orders  to 
the  train  dispatcher,  and  obtain  Clearance  Card. 
(Form  A.) 
Tram  83c.  Conductors,  before  leaving  a  train  regis- 

registering. 

ter  station,  and  on  arriving  at  the  terminal  tram 
register  station  must,  unless  otherwise  provided, 
enter  thereon  all  information  required  by  the 
form.  They  must  also  examine  this  train  register 
at  such  stations  and  obtain  information  required 
by  Rule  83,  furnishing  copy  of  same  to  engine- 
man  on  blank  Form  1015.  Enginemen  must 
receive  and  examine  this  register  check  before 
leaving  train  register  stations.  Where  trains 
start  from  other  than  register  stations,  this 
information  will  be  given  in  train  order  form 
by  the  train  dispatcher. 

Bulletins.  83cL  Bulletins  will  be  posted  on  boards  pro- 
vided for  the  purpose;  those  for  conductors 
and  enginemen  will  be  located  as  shown  on 
time-tables,  and  for  yardmen  will  be  located  in 
yards  where  yardmen  are  employed. 

44 


Conductors  and  enginemen  must  consult  bulle-  ^Slun ns 
tins  before  departing,  and  yardmen  before  com-boards- 
mencing  the  day's  work,  and  will  be  held  ac- 
countable   for    all    bulletins    posted.     Bulletins 
affecting  the  safety  of  trains,  when  sent  to  trains 
between  terminal  points,  will  be  in  31  form  of 
train  order. 

D-83.    A  train  must  not  leave  its  initial  stat ion  Leaving 

....  ,,...  .  ..  ,  .,  terminals. 

on  any  division,  or  subdivision,  or  a  junction,  until 
it  has  been  ascertained  whether  all  superior  trains 
due  have  left. 

Stations  at  which  train  registers  are  located  may 
be  designated  by  time-table. 

84.  A  train  must  not  start  until  the  proper  signal 

^       r       to    start. 

signal  is  given. 

85.  When  a  train  of  one  schedule  is  on  the  schedule  on 

time     of 

time  of  another  schedule  of  the  same  class  in  the ano 
same  direction,  it  will  proceed  on  its  own  schedule. 

Trains  of  one  schedule  may  pass  trains  ofTrains  pass 

J      *  another. 

another  schedule  of  the  same  class,  and  extra 
trains  may  pass  and  run  ahead  of  2d  and  3d 
class  trains  and  extra  trains. 

A  section  may  pass  and  run  ahead  of  another  s|2ions 
section  of  the  same  schedule,  first  exchanging anotner- 
train  orders,  signals  and  numbers  with  the  section 
to  be  passed.     The  change  in  sections  must  be 
reported  from  the  next  available  point  of  com- 
munication. 

D-85.     When  a  train  of  one  schedule  is  on  the  schedule  on 
time  of  another  schedule  of  the  same  class  it  will  aSSther. 
proceed  on  its  own  schedule. 

Trains  of  one  schedule  may  pass  trains  of  another  Trains  pass 

another. 

schedule  of  the  same  class,  and  extra  trains  may 
pass  and  run  ahead  of  2d  and  3d  class  trains  and 
extra  trains. 

45 


sections  A  section  may  pass  and  run  ahead  of  another 

section  of  the  same  schedule,  first  exchanging  train 
orders,  signals  and  numbers  with  the  section  to  be 
passed.  The  change  in  sections  must  be  reported 
from  the  next  available  point  of  communication. 

inferior  86.  Unless  otherwise  provided,  an  inferior  train 

trains    clear  •"•*•»  •  • 

following  must  clear  the  time  or  a  superior  train,  in  the 
same  direction,  not  less  than  five  minutes;  but 
must  be  clear  at  the  time  a  first-class  train,  in 
the  same  direction,  is  due  to  leave  the  next 
station  in  the  rear  where  time  is  shown. 

inferior  87.  An  inferior  train  must  keep  out  of  the  way 

trains    clear  .  . 

S£sing  <rf  opposing  superior  trains  and  failing  to  clear 
the  main  track  by  the  time  required  by  rule  must 
be  protected  as  prescribed  by  Rule  99. 

Extras  dear     Extra  trains  must  clear  the  time  of  opposing 

t?atosue      regular  trains  not  less  than  five  minutes  unless 

otherwise   provided,   and  will   be  governed   by 

train  orders  with  respect  to  opposing  extra  trains. 

Meeting  88.  At  meeting  points  between  trains  of  the 

SS£?'     me  same  class,  the  inferior  train  must  clear  the  main 

track  before  the  leaving  time  of  the  superior  train. 

Meeting  At  meeting  points  between  extra  trains,  the 

?iolrntscias3.  °~  train  in  the  inferior  time-table  direction  must  take 
the  siding  unless  otherwise  provided. 

side  Trains  must  pull  into  the  siding  when  practic- 

able; if  necessary  to  back  in,  the  train  must  first 
be  protected  as  prescribed  by  Rule  99,  unless 
otherwise  provided. 

side  track- ^89.  At    meeting    points    betwee'n    trains    of 

*'  different  classes  the  inferior  train  must  take  the 

siding  and  clear  the  superior  train  at  least  five 

46 


minutes,   and  must  pull  into  the  siding  when 
practicable.     If  necessary  to  back  in,  the  train 
must  first  be  protected  as  prescribed  by  Rule  99 
unless  otherwise  provided. 
x*  90.  Trains    must    stop    at    schedule    meeting;  stop  at 

JT  e>  schedule 

points,  if  the  train  to  be  met  is  of  the  same  class  S£B 
unless  the  switch  is  right  and  the  track  clear. 

When  the  expected  train  of  the  same  class  is  Approaching 

*  meeting 

not  found  at  the  schedule  meeting  point,  thepoints- 
superior   train  must   approach   all  sidings  pre- 
pared to  stop,  until  the  expected  train  is  met. 

Trains  must  stop  clear  of  the  switch  used  by 
the  train  to  be  met  in  going  on  the  siding. 

The  engineman  will  give  signal  14  (n)  at  least  whistle  sig- 
one  mile  before  reaching  a  schedule  meeting  point ing  p0"113- 
with  a  train  of  the  same  or  superior  class,  or  a 
point  where  by  train  order  the  train  is  to  meet 
or    wait    for    an    opposing    train.     Should    the 
engineman  fail  to  give  signal  14  (n)  as  herein 
prescribed,  the  conductor  must  take  immediate 
action  to  stop  the  train. 

90a.  When  trains  meet  or  pass  by  special  order  identifying 
or  time-table  schedule,  conductors  must  inform 
each  other  verbally  what  trains  they  are,  and 
enginemen  must  satisfy  themselves  as  to  their 
proper  identity. 

91.  Unless  some  form  of  block  signals  is  used,  spacing 

7  trains. 

traias  in  the  same  direction  must  keep  at  least 
five  minutes  apart,  except  in  closing  up  at 
stations.  A  train  following  a  train  carrying 
passengers  must  keep  at  least  ten  minutes  be- 
hind it. 

47 


spacing  91a.  The  time  space  to  be  maintained  between 

time    in 

ame  tables,  trains  in  the  same  direction  will  be  regulated 
by  special  rule  on  each  division  time-table.  This 
rule  will  not  relieve  trainmen  from  observing 
all  rules  in  regard  to  the  protection  of  their 
trains. 

gearancw  y   916.  Freight  trains  must   not  pass  an  open 

blocking.  train  order  station  in  districts  where  their  move- 
ments are  not  controlled  by  automatic  or  manual 
block  signals,  except  as  provided  by  division 
time-tables,  or  special  instructions,  until  the 
conductor  and  enginemen  have  received  a 
Clearance  Card  (Form  A)  or  (Form  A-l)  from  the 
operator. 

Passenger  trains  will  observe  the  same  rule  at 
such  train  order  stations  as  are  regular  stops  for 
their  train.  This  will  not  relieve  operators  from 
promptly  displaying  signal  at  Stop  whenever 
they  have  orders,  or  making  other  necessary 
efforts  to  stop  trains. 

clearance         A  Clearance  Card  (Form  A)    properly   filled 

when     signal  .        \  ,  i 

is  at  stop.  ou£  must  be  given  in  duplicate  to  the  conductor 


and  enginemen  of  a  train  when  the  train  order 
signal  is  at  Stop. 

With  the  exceptions  noted,  a  Clearance  Card 
(Form  A-l),  properly  filled  out  must  be  given 
in  duplicate  to  the  conductor  and  enginemen  of 
all  trains,  when  the  train  order  signal  is  at 
Proceed,  and  no  orders  have  been  received  for 
their  train. 
schedule  92.  A  train  must  not  arrive  at  a  station  in 

arriving  .     . 

time.          advance  of  its  schedule  arriving  time. 

48 


A  train  must  not  leave  a  station  in  advance  of  schedule 

leaving 

its  schedule  leaving  time. 

93.  Within  yard  limits  the  main  track  may  be  ]£0^gf8* 
used,  protecting  against  first  class  trains. 

Second  and  third  class  and  extra  trains  must 
move  within  yard  limits  prepared  to  stop  unless 
the  main  track  is  seen  or  known  to  be  clear. 

93a.  Yard  limits  will  be  indicated  by  "  yard  Yard  en- 

r  gines    pro- 

limit"  signs.     Within  these  limits  the  main  track tecting- 

may  be  used  by  yard  engines  against  second  and 
third  class  trains,  protecting  when  view  is  ob- 
scured or  during  foggy  or  stormy  weather;  but 
the  time  of  first-class  trains  must  be  cleared  not 
less  than  five  minutes. 

94.  A  train  which  overtakes  another  train  so  Disabled 
disabled  that  it  cannot  proceed  will  pass  it,  if 
practicable,   and   if   necessary   will   assume   the 
schedule  and  take  the  train  orders  of  the  disabled 
train,  proceed  to  the  next  available  point  of  com- 
munication, and  there  report  to  the  chief  train 
dispatcher.     The  disabled  train  will  assume  the 
right  or  schedule  and  take  the  train  orders  of  the 

last  train  with  which  it  has  exchanged,  and  will, 
when  able,  proceed  to  and  report  from  the  next 
available  point  of  communication. 

When  a  train,  unable  to  proceed  against  the  Assuming  a 

7  *;  .  °  schedule    01 

right  or  schedule  of  an  opposing  tram,  is  over- right- 
taken  between  communicating  stations  by  an 
inferior  train  or  a  train  of  the  same  class  having 
right  or  schedule  which  permits  it  to  proceed, 
the  delayed  train  may,  after  proper  under- 
standing with  the  following  train,  precede  it  to 

49 


Combined 
rights. 


Overtaking 
disabled 


the  next  available  point  of  communication, 
where  it  must  report  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher. 
When  opposing  trains  are  met  under  these  cir- 
cumstances, it  must  be  fully  explained  to  them 
by  the  leading  train  that  the  expected  train  is 
following. 

94a.  Rule  94  must  never  be  used  as  authority 
for  trains  to  proceed  under  the  combined  rights 
or  schedules  of  two  trains. 

D-94  A  train  which  overtakes  a  superior  train, 
so  disabled  that  it  cannot  proceed  will  pass  it,  if 
practicable,  and  if  necessary  will  assume  the 
schedule  and  take  the  train  orders  of  the  disabled 
train,  proceed  to  the  next  available  point  of  com- 
munication, and  there  report  to  the  chief  train 
dispatcher.  The  disabled  train  will  assume  the 
schedule  and  take  the  train  orders  of  the  last  train 
with  which  it  has  exchanged,  and  will,  when  able, 
proceed  to  and  report  from  the  next  available  point 
of  communication. 

95.  Two  or  more  sections  may  be  run  on  the 
same  schedule. 

Each  section  has  equal  time-table  authority. 

A  train  must  not  display  signals  for  a  following 
section,  except  as  prescribed  by  Rule  85,  without 
orders  from  the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

95a.  Under  no  circumstances  must  a  freight 
train  or  light  engine  run  as  a  following  section  of  a 
passenger  train. 

D-95.  Two  or  more  sections  may  be  run  on  the 
same  schedule. 

Each  section  has  equal  time-table  authority. 

-4  train  must  not  display  signals  for  a  following 
sections.  8ectton,  except  as  prescribed  by  Rule  D-85,  without 
orders  from  the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

50 


Running 
in    sections. 


Not  as  sec- 


Running 


96.  When  signals  displayed  for  a  section 
taken  down  at  any  point  before  that  section 
arrives,  the  conductor,  if  there  be  no  other  pro- 
vision, will  arrange  in  writing  with  the  operator, 
or  if  there  be  no  operator,  with  the  switchtender, 
or  in  the  absence  of  both,  with  a  flagman  left 
there  for  that  purpose,  to  nptify  all  opposing 
trains  that  the  section  for  which  signals  were 
displayed  has  not  arrived,  and,  in  addition,  the 
conductor    must    notify    all    opposing    inferior 
trains,  or  trains  of  the  same  class,  until  the  fact 
that  the  signals  were  carried  has  been  registered 
at  the  next  register  station. 

97.  Extra  trains  must  not  be  run  without  train  Running 

extra. 

orders. 

97a.  Work  extras  will  be  assigned  working 
limits  by  train  order. 

Conductors  must  report  by  wire  to  the  chief 
train  dispatcher  when  their  work  is  finished  for 
the  day,  and  state  their  working  limits  for  the 
following  day. 

D-97.     Unless   otherwise  provided,    extra    trains  Running 
must  not  be  run  without  train  orders. 

Work  extras  must  move  with  the  current  of  traffic 
unless  otherwise  directed. 

D-97a.  On  portions  of  the  road  so  specified  on 
the  time-table,  or  by  special  instructions,  extra 
trains  will  run  with  the  current  of  traffic  without 
train  orders. 

98.  Trains  must  approach  the  end  of  double 
track,  junctions,  railroad  crossings  at  grade  and 
drawbridges,  with  caution.     Where  required  by 
rule  or  by  law,  trains  must  stop. 

51 


Trains  using  a  siding  must  proceed  with  cau- 
tion, expecting  to  find  it  occupied  by  other  trains. 

nun  with        98a.  All  freight  and  extra  trains  will  approach 

caution.  c  rxr 

and  pass  all  stations,  isolated  sidings,  water- 
tanks  and  coal-sheds  with  caution  and  under 
full  control,  expecting  to  find  trains  within  the 
switches  or  taking  coal  or  water.  Trains  occu- 
pying main  track  at  stations  will  protect  against 
superior  trains  in  all  cases,  and  will  protect  against 
all  trains  where  the  view  is  obscured,  or  when  fog, 
storms,  unusual  stops,  or  other  causes  require 
additional  safeguards. 

Know  axed  986.  Enghiemen  must  know  the  indication  of 
cation.  au  fixed  signals  before  passing  them.  Approach- 
ing railroad  crossings  at  grade,  drawbridges,  junc- 
tions, interlocking  plants  or  train  order  offices, 
they  will  require  the  fireman  to  observe  and 
communicate  the  indications  of  all  signals. 

Train        I/ 99.     When  a  train  stops  under  circumstances 

protection.    IT,  . 

in  which  it  may  be  overtaken  by  another  tram, 
the  flagman  must  go  back  immediately  with 
flagman's  signals  a  sufficient  distance  to  insure 
full  protection,  placing  two  torpedoes,  and  when 
necessary,  in  addition,  displaying  lighted  fusees. 

When  signal  14  (rf),  or  14  (e)j  has  been  given 
to  the  flagman  and  safety  to  the  train  will  permit, 
he  may  return.  When  the  conditions  require  he 
will  leave  the  torpedoes  and  a  lighted  fusee. 

The  front  of  the  train  must  be  protected  in  the 
same  way  when  necessary  by  the  front  brakeman 
or  fireman. 

52 


When-  a  train  is  moving  under  circumstances  in 
which  it  may  be  overtaken  by  another  train,  the 
flagman  must  take  such  action  as  may  be  neces- 
sary to  insure  full  protection.  By  night,  or  by 
day  when  the  view  is  obscured,  lighted  fusees 
must  be  thrown  off  at  proper  intervals. 

When  day  signals  cannot  be  plainly  seen,  owing 
to  weather  or  other  conditions,  night  signals  must 
also  be  used. 

Conductors  and  enginemen  are  responsible  for 
the  protection  of  their  trains. 
Flagman's  signals: 

Day  signals — A  red  flag, 

Torpedoes  and 
Fusees. 
Night  signals — A  red  light, 

A  white  light, 
Torpedoes  and 
Fusees. 
jX  99a.    When  a  flagman  goes  back  to  protect  a  placing 

*  .  .  i  fusees  and 

train  at  night,  or  in  obscure  weather,  he  will  torpedoes, 
place  a  lighted  fusee  in  the  center  of  the  track 
five  hundred  feet  back  of  the  rear  of  the  train, 
and  proceed  back  until  proper  distance  is  reached 
to  insure  full  protection. 

If  a  following  train  is  in  sight  or  hearing  before 
the  flagman  has  reached  a  point  insuring  full 
protection,  he  must  at  once  place  two  torpedoes 
on  the  rail,  and  at  night,  or  in  obscure  weather, 
or  if  the  view  is  obscured,  he  will,  in  addition, 
display  a  lighted  fusee  and  continue  toward  the 
approaching  train,  displaying  stop  signals  until 
they  are  answered. 

53 


In  placing  torpedoes  they  will  be  securely  fas- 
tened to  the  top  of  the  rail  on  the  engineman's 
side  two  hundred  feet  apart,  and,  when  practic- 
able, not  closer  than  five  hundred  feet  from  a 
whistling  post. 

when     996.     An  engineman  finding  it  necessary  from 
spe2de        any  cause  to  reduce  speed  or  stop  at  any  unusual 
place,  will  sound  the  whistle  signal  14  (c). 

Moving  99c.     A  train  moving  contrary  to  its  normal 

tSuS.  direction  without  proper  authority  must  be  pre- 
ceded by  a  flagman  sent  far  enough  in  advance 
of  the  movement  to  insure  absolute  protection. 

Trainmen         100.    When  the  flagman  goes  back  to  protect 

places6  .      the  rear  of  the  train,   the  front  brakeman  or 

baggageman  must,  in  the  case  of  passenger  trains, 

and   the  next   brakeman,   in   the  case  of  other 

trains,  take  his  place  on  the  train. 

protection  101.  Trains  must  be  fully  protected  against 
tLns^  inter-  any  known  condition  which  interferes  with  their 
mai  speed.  gafe  passage  at  normal  speed. 

When  conditions  are  found  which  may  interfere 
with  the  safe  passage  of  trains  at  normal  speed 
and  no  protection  has  been  provided,  such  action 
must  be  taken  as  will  insure  safety. 

storms  and  lOla.  When  overtaken  between  stations  by 
severe  storms  or  indication  of  high  water  which 
threatens  damage,  trains  will  proceed  with  great 
caution,  and  under  control,  so  that  they  can  be 
stopped  in  time  to  prevent  accident.  Conductors 
and  enginemen  will  examine  bridges  and  culverts 
or  other  places  subject  to  damage  by  high  water 

54 


and  if  they  find  any  indications  of  danger,  will, 
on  arrival  at  the  first  point  of  communication, 
notify  the  agent  or  operator,  report  by  wire  to 
the  chief  train  dispatcher,  and  not  proceed  until 
instructions  are  received. 

1016.  Between  December  1st  and  April  15th  rs£ 
when  low  temperature  prevails  and  at  all  times 
during  heavy  rainstorms  or  unusual  track  condi- 
tions, train  and  enginemen  must  use  great  care 
and  speed  of  trains  must  be  restricted  so  as  to 
insure  safety. 

Wlc.  Delayed  fast  passenger  trains  must  not  ^h 
exceed  their  scheduled  speed  when  temperature 
is  near  or  below  zero;  local  passenger  trains 
scheduled  at  moderate  rate  of  speed  may  make 
up  delays  incident  to  ordinary  station  stops. 
The  scheduled  speed  of  the  fastest  passenger  train 
between  any  stations  shall  be  the  maximum  speed 
of  any  train  between  such  stations. 

lOld  When  trains  are  running  under  slowsiow 
speed  orders  or  temporary  slow  speed  signal,  a 
man  must  be  stationed  on  the  last  car  and  will 
give  Proceed  signal  to  the  engineman  after 
the  last  car  has  passed  the  limit  where  speed  is 
restricted.  Enginemen  will  maintain  speed  desig- 
nated until  the  Proceed  signal  is  given  and 
will  acknowledge  it  by  whistle  signal  14  (g). 

IQle.  During  stormy  or  foggy  weather  and  ft°drnj£ggy 
when  signals  cannot  be  plainly  seen,  enginemen  Sgn^An- 
and  trainmen  must  be  particularly  alert;  trains  dl( 
must  move  under  such  control  as  to  insure  stop- 
ping before  passing  a  signal,  the  indication  of 

55 


which  is  not  known,  and  if  the  indication  cannot 
then  be  seen  the  train  will  be  governed  in  accord- 
ance with  the  most  restrictive  indication  of  that 
signal.  Switching  movements  must  not  be  made 
on  main  track  except  under  Rule  99.  Delays 
will  be  expected. 

Foggy  101/.  During  foggy  or  stormy  weather  that 

weatherrmy  obstructs  the  view,  also  when  the  view  is  other- 
protection.  wjge  obstructed,  trains  must  pass  through  all 
stations  at  a  greatly  reduced  speed  and  must 
sound  the  crossing  whistle  signal  with  sufficient 
frequency  to  protect  all  street  crossings,  whether 
protected  by  gates  or  otherwise,  so  as  to  avoid 
danger  to  vehicles  or  persons.  One  such  whistle 
signal  may  be  given  for  two  or  more  crossings 
within  a  distance  of  1000  feet  from  point  of 
whistling. 

Trains   part     102.     If  a  train  should  part  while  in  motion, 
motion.111     trainmen  must,  if  possible,  prevent  damage  to 
the  detached  portions.     The  signals  prescribed 
by  Rules  12  (e)  and  14  (/)  must  be  given. 

The  detached  portions  must  not  be  moved  or 
passed  until  the  front  portion  comes  back. 

D-102.    If  a  train  should  part  while  in  motion, 
while8  inDart  trainmen  must,  if  possible,  prevent  damage  to  the 
motion.         detached  portions.     The  signals  prescribed  by  Rules 
12  (e)  and  14  (/)  must  be  given. 

The  detached  portion  must  not  be  moved  or 
passed  until  the  front  portion  comes  back. 

The  engineman  and  trainmen  of  the  front  por- 
tion must  give  the  train-parted  signal  to  trains 
running  on  the  opposite  track.  A  train  receiving 
this  signal  or  being  otherwise  notified  that  a  train 
on  the  opposite  track  has  parted,  must  immediately 
reduce  speed  and  proceed  with  caution  until  the 
separated  train  is  passed. 

56 


When  a  train  is  disabled  so  it  may  obstruct  the 
opposite  track,  trains  on  that  tradk  must  be  stopped. 

103.  When  cars  are  pushed  by  an  engine,  cars  pushed 

;  by  engine. 

except  when  shifting  or  making  up  trains  in  yards, 
a  trainman  must  take  a  conspicuous  position  on 
the  front  of  the  leading  car. 

103a.     Trains  or  cars  must  not  be  pushed  over  cars  rushed 

•  i  ,  ,.  .  i-i  i       ,    •  by    engine 

street  or  public  crossings,  highways,  electric  orjj|r  cross~ 
steam  railway  crossings  at  grade  unless  a  member 
of  the  crew  is  on  the  leading  car. 

When  the  view  of  the  trainman  is  obstructed 
and  there  are  no  gates  or  flagman,  a  member  of 
the  crew  must  be  on  the  ground  ahead  to  see  that 
the  crossing  is  clear,  and  that  there  is  no  one 
approaching. 

No  car  containing  passengers  or  employes 
must  be  switched  unless  coupled  to  the  engine  and 
air  brakes  in  use. 

/X"1036.     Except    in    suburban    service    engines  Engine 
backing  up  with  or  without  cars  will  not  exceed 
20  miles  per  hour  on  straight  track  and  15  miles 
per  hour  on  curves. 

When  switch  engines  are  run  over  the  road  speed  of 

switch 

their  speed  must  not  exceed  15  miles  per  hour.     eneine- 

104.  Switches  must  be  left  in  proper  position  Position  ^ 
after  having  been  used.     Conductors  are  respon- switches- 
sible  for  the  position  of  the  switches  used  by  them 

and  their  trainmen,  except  where  switchtenders 
are  stationed,  but  when  practicable,  the  engine- 
man  must  see  that  the  switches  nearest  the  engine 
are  properly  set. 

*  - 

57 


A  switch  must  not  be  left  open  for  a  following 
train  unless  in  charge  of  a  trainman  of  such  train. 

See  Present  Rule  104c. 

switch  con-      104a.  Before  a  switch  which  is  protected  by  a 

•fenti.  v      mechanically  connected  signal  is  opened  for  a 

movement,  the  lever  which  controls  the  signal 

must  first  be  placed  so  as  to  cause  the  signal 

to  give  its  most  restrictive  indication. 

After  resetting  the  switch  for  main  track  the 
lever  which  controls  the  signal  must  be  replaced 
in  its  normal  position  and  locked. 

Signals  protecting  switches  do  not  relieve  train- 
men from  protecting  as  prescribed  by  Rule  99. 
stand  1046.     Trainmen  or  other  employes  must  not 

She?0111  unlock  nor  stand  within  .twenty  feet  of  a  main 
track  switch  on  the  approach  or  during  the  passing 
of  any  train,  and  when  practicable  will  stand  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  track  from  the  switch 
lever. 

Main  track  switches  must  be  kept  locked  when 
not  in  use.  Derailers,  except  while  being  used, 
must  be  kept  in  derailing  position  and  locked, 
whether  or  not  there  are  cars  on  the  siding  on 
which  they  are  located. 

Defective  104c.  If  a  main  track  switch  is  defective,  or 
has  a  defective  lock,  the  switch  must  be  secured 
and  reported  at  once  by  wire  to  the  superin- 
tendent. 

switch  104d.     Main  track  switch  targets  will  show 

edge  of  target  and  at  night  a  green  light  when  set 
for  main  track,  or  face  of  target  and  at  night  a 
red  light  when  set  for  siding,  or  junction  track. 

58 


105.  Both  the  conductor  and  the  engineman  g 

are  responsible  for  the  safety  of  the  train  and  the  <*  train- 
observance  of  the  rules,  and,  under  conditions 
not  provided  for  by  the  rules,  must  take  every 
precaution  for  protection. 

106.  Trains  must  use  caution  in  passing  a  train  J^f*111^. 
receiving  or  discharging  passengers  at  a  station  paSglra. 
and,  except  where  proper  safeguards  are  provided 

or  the  movement  is  otherwise  protected,  must  not 
pass  between  it  and  the  platform  at  which  the 
passengers  are  being  received  or  discharged. 

106a.  Freight  trains  must  not  obstruct  the  free  Not  obstruct 

passage-  of 

passage  of  passengers  between  passenger  station  passengers. 
platforms   or   street    crossings   when   passenger 
trains  are  due. 

1066.     A  train  running  upon  or  near  the  time  caution 

when    run- 

of  a  train  scheduled  to  carry  passengers  and  to  J/^JgiS?9 
stop  will  exercise  extreme  caution  prepared  to ger 
to  stop,  if  necessary,  in  approaching  and  passing 
through  such  stations,  expecting  to  find  persons 
crossing  tracks. 

D-lOSc.     When  two  trains  are  nearing  a  station  TWO  trains 
from  opposite  directions  at  the  same  time  and  ?tSionCsam« 
only  one  of  them  is  scheduled  to  stop,  the  train  to  time' 
stop  must  reduce  speed  to  let  the  other  pass  the 
station  before  it  arrives.     When  two  trains  going 
in  opposite  directions  arrive  at  a  station  and  both 
are  scheduled  to  stop,  the  less  important  train  will 
not  go  to  platform  until  the  other  train  has  de- 
parted. 

In  suburban  districts,  trains  must  not  enter  a 
station  at  which  a  passenger  train  in  the  opposite 
direction  is  standing  or  at  which  it  is  stopping  to 
receive  or  discharge  passengers,  until  the  rear  coach 

59 


of  such  train  has  passed  the  end  of  the  station 
platform  nearest  the  approaching  train,  unless  the 
tracks  are  separated  by  fences. 

Take  safe         107.     In  case  of  doubt  or  uncertainty  the  safe 

course. 

course  must  be  taken. 
Messages          108.     Messages  or  orders  respecting  the  move- 

or    orders. 

ment  of  trains  or  the  condition  of  track  or  bridges 
must  be  in  train  order  form. 

Running  D-151.     Trains   must   keep  to    the    left,    unless 

otherwise  provided. 

crossing  to       D-152.     When  a  train  crosses  over  to,  or  obstructs 
txack.lte        tne  other  track,  unless  otherwise  provided  it  must 
first  be  protected  as  prescribed  by  Rule  99,  in  both 
directions  on  that  track. 

obstruct  D-152a.    A    train    must    not    cross    over    to,    or 

3OTS?S?ior  obstruct    the   movement   of  a   superior    train   on 
train-  another  track,  except  to  avoid  delay  to  a  superior 

train  following. 

Double    .          D-152b.     When  double  track  is  made  single  track 
sSgie  Track,  it  must  be  operated  under  single  track  and  manual 
block  rules. 

Operators  must  block  without  special  instruc- 
tions. 

Orders  D-FormS  must,  when  possible,  be  delivered 
to  trains  before  they  arrive  at  the  single  track  district 
and  when  practicable  be  addressed  to  the  operator 
at  each  end  of  the  single  track,  who  will  deliver 
copies  to  trains  entering  upon  the  single  track. 

As  an  additional  precaution  a  flagman  will  be 

placed  at  each  end  of  the  block  of  track  obstructed. 

Diverted  D-152c.    In  diverting  a  train  against  the  current 

trains.          Qf  fraffic  the  diverting  order  must,  when  practicable, 

be  delivered  to  all  trains  on  both  tracks  while  the 

train  is  being  diverted  and  when  practicable  be 

addressed  to  all  operators  in  the  district  in  which 

the  train  is  diverted. 

60 


The  diverted  train  will  not  cross  back  to  its  proper 
track  without  a  train  order.  When  possible,  orders 
must  be  delivered  to  trains  before  they  arrive  at  the 
diverting  points. 


RULES  FOR  MOVEMENT_BY  TRAIN  ORDERS. 

201.  For   movements   not   provided   for    by  Authority 
time-table,  train  orders  will  be  issued  by  authority orders- 
and  over  the  signature  of  the  chief  train  dis- 
patcher.    They  must  contain  neither  information 

nor  instructions  not  essential  to  such  movements. 

They  must  be  brief  and  clear;  in  the  prescribed 
forms  when  applicable;  and  without  erasure,  alter- 
ation or  interlineation. 

Figures  in  train  orders  must  not  be  surrounded 
by  brackets,  circles  or  other  characters. 

202.  Each  train  order  must  be  given  in  the  order  in 

same  words. 

same  words  to  all  employes  or  trains  addressed. 

203.  Train  orders  must   be   numbered   con- Numbering 

orders. 

secutively  each  day,  beginning  at  midnight. 

204.  Train  orders  must  be  addressed  to  those 
who  are  to  execute  them,  naming  the  place  at 
which  each  is  to  receive  his  copy.     Those  for  a 
train  must  be  addressed  to  the  conductor  and 
engineman,  and  also  to  any  one  who  acts  as  its 
pilot.     A  copy  for  each  employe  addressed  must 
be  supplied  by  the  operator. 

Orders  addressed  to  operators  restricting  the 
movement  of  trains  must  be  respected  by  con- 
ductors and  enginemen  the  same  as  if  addressed 
to  them. 

61 


Record  of        205.     Each  train  order  must  be  written  in  full 

train 

in  a  book  provided  for  the  purpose  at.  the  office 
of  the  chief  train  dispatcher;  and  with  it  recorded 
the  names  of  those  who  have  signed  for  the  order; 
the  time  and  the  signals  which  show  when  and 
from  what  offices  the  order  was  repeated  and  the 
responses  transmitted;  and  the  train  dispatcher's 
initials.  These  records  must  be  made  at  once, 
and  never  from  memory  or  memoranda. 

Trains,  how/^206.     In  train  orders  regular  trains  will  be 

designated. 

designated  as  "No.  10,"  and  sections  as  " Second 
10."  Extra  trains  will  be  designated  by  engine 
numbers,  and  the  direction  as  " Extra  798  'East' 
or 'West.'" 

In  transmitting  train  orders  by  telegraph,  time 
will  be  stated  in  words,  and  duplicated  in  figures. 

In  transmitting  train  orders  by  telephone  the 
names  of  stations  must  be  plainly  pronounced,  and 
then  spelled,  letter  by  letter,  thus:  Aurora, 
A-u-r-o-r-aj  all  numerals  must  first  be  pronounced, 
and  then  followed  by  spelling,  thus:  1-0-5,  0-n-e 
N-a-u-g-h-t  F-i-v-e;  the  train  dispatcher  must 
write  the  order  as  he  transmits  it  and  underscore 
it  as  it  is  being  repeated.  The  letters  duplicating 
names  of  stations  and  numerals  will  not  be  written 
in  the  order  book  nor  upon  train  orders. 

Even  hours  must  not  be  used  in  stating  time 
of  day  in  train  orders,  such  as  10.00  a.  m. 

Engines  of  //206a.  When  engines  of  foreign  railroads  are 
moved,  train  orders  must  show  their  initials 
prefixed  to  engine  numbers. 

62  I*' 


207.  To  transmit  a  train  order,   the  signal  f^* 
"31 "  or  the  signal  "  19"  followed  by  the  direction  " 
must  be  given  to  each  office  addressed,  the  number 

of  copies  being  stated,  if  more  or  less  than  three — 
thus,  "31,  West,  copy  5,"  or  "19,  East,  copy  2." 

208.  A  train  order  to  be  sent  to  two  or  more  £fra 
offices  must  be  transmitted  simultaneously  to  as 
many  of  them  as  practicable.     When  not  sent 
simultaneously  to  all,  the  order  must  be  sent  first 
to  the  superior  train. 

The  several  addresses  must  be  in  the  order  of 
superiority  of  trains,  each  office  taking  its  proper 
address,  and  when  practicable  must  include  the 
operator  at  the  meeting  or  waiting  point. 

Copies  of  the  order  addressed  to  the  operator 
at  the  meeting  or  waiting  point  must  be  delivered 
to  the  trains  affected  until  all  have  arrived  from 
one  direction. 

A  train  order  must  not  be  sent  to  a  superior 
train  at  the  meeting  point  if  it  can  be  avoided. 
When  an  order  is  so  sent,  the  fact  will  be  stated 
in  the  order  and  special  precautions  must  be  taken 
to  insure  safety. 

208a.     When  a  train  order  (Form  C)  is  sent,  it  Restricting 
must,   when   practicable,   include    the   operator r8 
at  the  point  where  the  rights  of  the  train  are 
restricted. 

2086.    A    "19"  train    order    restricting    the  Restricting 

f,  .  rights. 

superiority  of  a  tram  over  an  opposing  tram 
will  not  be  sent  to  the  point  where  such 
superiority  is  restricted. 

63 


riSSctfcIif  208c.  A  train  order  restricting  the  rights  of  a 
passenger  train  must  not  be  sent  to  the  meeting 
or  waiting  point  unless  it  is  a  regular  stop  for  such 
train  or  the  signature  of  the  conductor  is  obtained 
before  "Complete"  is  given  to  the  inferior  train. 

Changing  or-     208d.     When  passenger  trains  are  affected,  in 

der   affecting  .  .  .          , 

Ksnger  no  instance  must  a  meeting  or  waiting  point  be 
changed  until  the  signature  of  the  conductor  of 
the  train  made  superior  by  train  order  has  first 
been  obtained,  or  the  order  has  been  sent  to 
station  reached  by  the  superior  train  before 
arriving  at  the  meeting  or  waiting  point  also  to 
the  operator  at  the  meeting  or  waiting  point. 

Take  siding.  208e.  When  a  train  order  is  issued  for  trains 
to  meet  at  a  specified  station  directing  which 
train  will  take  siding,  and  it  is  desired  to  change 
meeting  point,  the  first  order  will  be  annulled, 
or  the  second  order  will  state  specifically  which 
train  will  take  siding  at  the  new  meeting  point. 

Transmission     D-208.    A  train  order  to  be  sent  to  two  or  more 

of  orders,  offices  must  be  transmitted  simultaneously  to  as 
many  of  them  as  practicable.  When  not  sent 
simultaneously  to  all,  the  order  must  be  sent  first 
to  the  superior  train. 

The  several  addresses  must  be  in  the  order  of 
superiority  of  trains,  each  office  taking  its*  proper 
address. 

209.     Operators   receiving  train  orders   must 


and    repeat-  .  •  /•    i  i      -i        •  ••  T/« 

ing  orders.  wnte  them  in  manifold  during  transmission.  If 
they  cannot  at  one  writing  make  the  requisite 
number  of  copies,  they  must  make  others  from  one 
of  the  copies  previously  made,  and  repeat  to  the 
train  dispatcher  from  the  new  copies  each  time 
additional  copies  are  made. 
64 


They  must  retain  a  copy  of  each  train  order. 

210.  When  a  "31"  train  order  has  been  trans- 
mitted,  operators  must,  unless  otherwise  directed, 
repeat  it  at  once  from  the  manifold  copy  in  the 
succession  in  which  the  several  offices  have  been 
addressed,  and  then  write  the  time  of  repetition 
on  the  order.     Each  operator  receiving  the  order 
should  observe  whether  the  others  repeat  correctly. 

Those  to  whom  the  order  is  addressed,  except 
enginemen,  must  then  sign  it,  and  the  operator 
will  send  their  signatures  preceded  by  the  number 
of  the  order  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher.  The 
response  "complete,"  and  the  time,  with  the 
initials  of  the  chief  train  dispatcher,  will  then  be 
given  by  the  train  dispatcher.  Each  operator 
receiving  this  response  will  then  write  on  each 
copy  the  word  "complete,"  the  time,  and  his 
last  name  in  full,  and  then  deliver  a  copy  to  each 
person  addressed,  except  enginemen.  The  copy 
for  each  engineman  must  be  delivered  to  him 
personally  by  conductor. 

Enginemen  must  show  train  orders  to  firemen 
and  when  practicable  to  forward  trainmen.  Con- 
ductors must  show  train  orders  when  practicable 
to  trainmen. 

210a.     When    there    is    more    than    one    31  when 
order    for    a    train    at    a    station,    "complete"  "complete." 
must  not  be  given  to  any  of  them  until  the  sig- 
nature has  been  obtained  to  all  of  them. 

211.  When   a  "19"  train    order    has   been  Transmitting 
transmitted,    operators   must,    unless    otherwise  ordera™ 
directed,   repeat  it  at  once  from  the  manifold 

65 


copy,  in  the  succession  in  which  the  several 
offices  have  been  addressed.  Each  operator  re- 
ceiving the  order  should  observe  whether  the 
others  repeat  correctly.  When  the  order  has 
been  repeated  correctly  by  an  operator,  the  re- 
sponse "  complete/7  and  the  time,  with  the  initials 
of  the  chief  train  dispatcher,  will  be  given  by  the 
train  dispatcher.  The  operator  receiving  this 
response  will  then  write  on  each  copy  the  word 
"complete,"  the  time,  and  his  last  name  in  full 
and  personally  deliver  a  copy  to  each  person 
addressed  without  taking  his  signature.  But  when 
delivery  to  engineman  will  take  the  operator  from 
the  immediate  vicinity  of  his  office,  the  engine- 
man's  copy  will  be  delivered  by  the  conductor. 
When  a  "19"  train  order  restricting  the  supe- 
riority of  a  train  is  issued  for  it  at  the  point  where 
such  superiority  is  restricted,  the  train  must  be 
brought  to  a  stop  before  delivery  of  the  order. 

Enginemen  must  show  train  orders  to  firemen 
and  when  practicable  to  forward  trainmen.  Con- 
ductors must  show  train  orders  when  practicable 
to  trainmen. 

Delivering  211a.  When  a  train  order  is  to  be  delivered  by 
an  operator  outside  of  an  office,  it  must  be  done 
from  the  platform  side  and  never  between  tracks. 

-x"  re-  212.  When  so  directed  by  the  train  dis- 
patcher, a  train  order  may  be  acknowledged  before 
repeating,  by  the  operator  responding:  "X; 

(Number  of  Train  Order)      tO     (Train  Number)  ,"    with    the   Oper- 

ator's  initials  and  office    signal.     The  operator 
must  then  write  on  the  order  his  initials  and  the 

time. 

66 


212a.     "X"  is  the  operator's  acknowledgment  Acknowl- 
edgment sig- 

that  an  order  has  been  received  for  a  specified  ^fayed!8" 
train,  or  trains,  that  the  train  order  signal  is  dis- 
played at   "stop,"  and  that  the  order  will  be 
delivered  when  made  " complete"  in  accordance 
with  the  rules. 

213.  "Complete"  must  not  be  given  to  a  train  "complete" 

r  not   to   be 

order  for  delivery  to  an  inferior  train  until  theciven- 
order  has  been  repeated  or  the  "X"  response  sent 
by  the  operator  who  receives  the  order  for  the 
superior  train. 

214.  When  a  train  order  has  been  repeated  or  -x"  re- 

sponse hold- 

"X"  response  sent,  and  before  "complete"  hasing  OTder- 
been  given,  the  order  must  be  treated  as  a  holding 
order  for  the  train  addressed,  but  must  not  be 
otherwise  acted  on  until  "complete"  has  been 
given. 

If  the  line  fail  before  an  office  has  repeated  an  Lme  failure, 
order  or  has  sent  the  "X"  response,  the  order  at 
that  office  is  of  no  effect  and  must  be  there  treated 
as  if  it  had  not  been  sent. 

216.  For  train  orders  delivered  by  the  train  £^°artche?, 
dispatcher  the  requirements  as  to  the  record  and 
delivery  are  the  same  as  at  other  offices. 

217.  A  train  order  to  be  delivered  to  a  train  Delivery  of 

order    at 

at  a  point  not  a  tram  order  office,  or  at  one  at  SS^^L 
which  the  office  is  closed,  must  be  addressed  to 

"  C.  and  E. at ,  care  of ," 

and  forwarded  and  delivered  by  the  conductor  or 
other  person  in  whose  care  it  is  addressed.  When 
form  31  is  used  "complete"  will  be  given  upon 
the  signature  of  the  person  by  whom  the  order  is 

67 


to  be  delivered,  who  must  be  supplied  with  copies 
for  the  conductor  and  engineman  addressed,  and 
a  copy  upon  which  he  shall  take  their  signatures. 
This  copy  he  must  deliver  to  the  first  operator 
accessible,  who  must  preserve  it,  and  at  once 
transmit  the  signatures  of  the  conductor  and 
engineraan  to  the  train  dispatcher. 

Orders  so  delivered  must  be  acted  on  as  if 
"  complete "  had  been  given  in  the  usual  way. 

For  orders  which  are  sent,  in  the  manner  herein 
provided,  to  a  train,  the  superiority  of  which  is 
thereby  restricted,  "  complete  "  must  not  be  given 
to  an  inferior  train  until  the  signatures  of  the 
conductor  and  engineman  of  the  superior  train 
have  been  sent  to  the  train  dispatcher. 
AH  sections  218.  When  a  train  is  named  in  a  train  order 

of    a    train. 

by  its  schedule  number  alone,  all  sections  of  that 
schedule  are  included,  and  each  must  have  copies 
delivered  to  it. 

"X"  re-  219.  An  operator  must  not  repeat  or  give  the 
S°b?  tfyen.  "X"  response  to  a  train  order  for  a  train  which 
has  been  c  leared  or  of  which  the  engine  has  passed 
his  train-order  signal  until  he  has  obtained  the 
signatures  of  the  conductor  and  engineman  to  the 
order. 

^®*  Train  orders  once  in  effect  continue  so 
until  fulfilled,  superseded  or  annulled.  Any  part 
of  an  order  specifying  a  particular  movement  may 
be  either  superseded  or  annulled. 

Orders  held  by  or  issued  for  or  any  part  of  an 

^ 

order  relating  to  a  regular  train  become  void 
when  such  train  loses  both  right  and  schedule  as 
prescribed  by  Rules  4  and  82,  or  is  annulled. 
68 


When  a  conductor  or  engineman,  or  both,  is 
relieved  before  the  completion  of  a  trip,  all  train 
orders  and  instructions  held  must  be  delivered  to 
the  relieving  conductor  or  engineman.  Such 
orders  or  instructions  must  be  compared  by 
the  conductor  and  engineman  before  proceeding. 

K220a.     A  list  of  orders  and  instructions  trans-  orders 
„  ,      -  ,  .  transferr 

ferred  from  one  conductor  or  engineman  to 
another  as  required  by  Rule  220,  must  be  made 
in  duplicate  in  writing  and  checked,  each  re- 
taining a  copy. 

220&.     Conductors  or  enginemen  will  not  be  ^^fn 
permitted  to  change  trains  before  completion  of 
a  trip,  without  the  consent  of  the   chief  train 
dispatcher. 

220c.     Orders  held  by  an  extra  train,  or  any  ggj" 
part  of  an  order  held  by  another  train  relating expim 
to  an  extra  train  become  void  when  the  existence 
of  such  extra  train  ends  by  limitation  of  time  or 
place. 

221.     A  fixed  signal  must  be  used  at  each  train-  r^ed 

0  signals. 

order  office,  which  shall  indicate  "stop"  when 
trains  are  to  be  stopped  for  train  orders.     When 
there   are   no   orders   the   signal   must   indicate 
"proceed." 
When  an  operator  receives  the  signal  "31,"  or  Display 

r  train   or 

"  19,"  followed  by  the  direction,  he  must  immedi- signal- 
ately  display  the  "stop  signal"  for  the  direction 
indicated  and  then  reply  "stop  displayed,"  adding 
the  direction;  and  until  the  orders  have  been 
delivered  or  annulled  the  signal  must  not  be  re- 
stored to  "proceed."  While  "stop"  is  indicated 

69 


trains  must  not  proceed  without  a  Clearance  Card 
(Form  A). 

forplifands  Operators  must  have  the  proper  appliances  for 
signaling.  nan(j  signaling  ready  for  immediate  use  if  the 
fixed  signal  should  fail  to  work  properly.  If  a 
signal  is  not  displayed  at  a  night  office,  trains 
which  have  not  been  notified  must  stop  and  as- 
certain the  cause,  and  report  the  facts  to  the  chief 
train  dispatcher  from  the  next  available  point  of 
communication. 

semaphore  Where  the  semaphore  is  used,  the  arm  indicates 
"stop"  when  horizontal  and  "proceed"  when  in 
a  vertical  or  diagonal  position. 

office  open       221a.  When  a  train  order  office  is  open  at  an 
Sour.          irregular  hour,  trains  must  be  notified  by  train 
order  or  special  instructions,   and  special  pre- 
cautions must  be  taken  to  call  the  attention  of 
trains  approaching  such  station. 

interlocking      2216.     At  an  interlocking  plant  in  automatic 
£>omstopslffna  signal  territory  the  home  interlocking  signal  may 

trains    for          c 

be  used  to  stop  trains  for  tram  orders.  A  red 
disc  or  red  flag  by  day  or  red  light  by  night  so 
placed  at  the  interlocking  station  that  it  can  be 
seen  from  the  train  so  stopped,  will  indicate  to 
enginemen  and  trainmen  that  there  are  train 
orders. 

Recording         222.     Operators   must   promptly   record   and 

and    report-  x  .  i  i  • 

ing  trains.  repOrt  to  the  tram  dispatcher  the  time  of  de- 
parture of  all  trains  and  the  direction  of  extra 
trains.  They  must  record  the  time  of  arrival  of 
trains  and  report  it  when  so  directed. 

70 


223.     The  following  signals  and  abbreviations 
may  be  used: 

Initials  for  signature  of  the  division  officers. 
Such  office  and  other  signals  as  are  arranged 

by  the  Superintendent  of  Telegraph. 
C  &  E — for  Conductor  and  Engineman. 
C  &  M — for  Conductor  and  Motorman. 
X — Train  will  be  held  until  train  order  is 

made  "  complete.' ' 
Com — for  Complete. 
O  S— Train  Report. 
No. — for  Number. 
Eng — for  Engine. 
Sec — for  Section. 
Psgr — for  Passenger. 
Frt— for  Freight. 
Mins — for  Minutes. 
Jet — for  Junction. 
Dispr — for  Train  Dispatcher. 
Opr — for  Operator. 
31  or  19 — to  clear  the  line  for  Train  Orders, 

and  for  Operators  to  ask  for  Train  Orders. 
S  D— for  "Stop  Displayed." 
The  usual  abbreviations  for  the  names  of  the 

months  and  stations. 


71 


RELAYING  TRAIN  ORDERS. 

Relaying  241.  To  relay  a  train  order  through  an  open 
office  to  a  train  not  in  direct  communication,  the 
train  dispatcher  will  transmit  it  to  the  operator 
at  the  relaying  point,  who  will  transmit  it 
to  destination.  The  person  receiving  it  must 
repeat  it  to  the  relaying  point  and  each 
word  and  number  must  be  underscored  by  the 
receiver  at  that  point.  It  must  then  be  repeated 
to  train  dispatcher,  and  if  correct,  the  train  dis- 
patcher will  respond  "  correct."  After  the  parties 
addressed  at  destination  have  signed  the  order, 
the  signature  must  be  given  to  relaying  office  and 
from  there  to  train  dispatcher,  and  "complete," 
time,  and  chief  train  dispatcher's  initials  will  be 
given.  Rules  206  and  210  will  be  observed. 

order  re-        242.     A  train  order  relayed  to  a  superior  train 

layed  to  su- 
perior tram,  restricting  its  rights  or  superiority,  must  be  sent 

and  " complete"  given  and  acknowledgment  re- 
ceived, before  the  "complete"  is  given  to  the 
inferior  train. 

Filing  243.     A  copy  of  every  relayed  order  must  be 

SSL.        filed  at  the  point  of  relaying,  bearing  the  name 
of  the  person  receiving  and  repeating  the  order. 
Train  at         244.     Upon  the  arrival  of  a  train  at  a  closed 
Se  stl6-  telephone  station  where  a  train  is  to  be  met  or 

tion 

passed,  if  it  is  not  in  sight,  the  conductor  must 
immediately  communicate  with  the  train  dis- 
patcher and  report  arrival  of  his  train,  giving 
his  name,  number  of  train  or  engine,  and  name 
of  station  or  siding. 

72 


FORMS  OF  TRAIN  ORDERS. 

NOTE. — In  the  forms  of  train  orders,  the  words  and  figures  in  italics 
are  examples,  indicating  the  manner  in  which  the  orders  are  to  be 
filled  out. 


A. 

Fixing  Meeting  Points  for  Opposing  Trains. 

(1.)     No  1  meet  No  #  at  £. 

No  3  meet  Second  4  at  B. 

No  5  meet  Extra  95  east  at  B. 

Extra  652  north  meet  Extra  231  south  at  B. 


(2.)     No  2  and  Second  4  meet  Nos  1  and  3  at 
C  and  Extra  95  west  at  D  (and  so  on). 
No  1  meet  No  2  at  B  Second  4  at  C  and 
Extra  95  east  at  D. 


Trains  receiving  these  orders  will  run  with 
respect  to  each  other  to  the  designated  points 
and  there  meet  in  the  manner  prescribed  by  the 
Rules. 

B. 

Directing  a  Train  to  Pass  or  Run  Ahead  of 
Another  Train. 

(1.)     No  1  pass  No  3  at  K. 

Both  trains  will  run  according  to  rule  to  the 
designated  point  and  there  arrange  for  the  rear 
train  to  pass  promptly. 


(2.)     No  6  pass  No  4  when  overtaken. 

Both  trains  will  run  according  to  rule  until  the 
second-named  train  is  overtaken  and  then  arrange 
for  the  rear  train  to  pass  promptly. 

73 


nated. 


(3)     Extra  594  east  run  ahead  of  No.  6  M  to  B. 
The  first-named  train  will  run  ahead  of  the 
second-named  train   between   the   points   desig- 


(4.)  Extra  95  west  run  ahead  of  No  3  B  until 
overtaken. 

The  first-named  train  will  run  ahead  of  the 
second-named  train  from  the  designated  point 
until  overtaken,  and  then  arrange  for  the  rear 
train  to  pass  promptly. 


(5.)     No  1  pass  No  3  at  K  and  run  ahead  of 
No  7  M  to  Z. 


When  an  inferior  train  receives  an  order  to  pass 
a  superior  train,  right  is  conferred  to  run  ahead 
of  the  train  passed  from  the  designated  point. 
Unless  some  form  of  block  signals  is  used,  the 
following  train  will  run  with  caution,  looking  out 
for  the  designated  train  ahead  until  the  order  is 
fulfilled. 

C. 

Giving  Right  Over  an  Opposing  Train. 

(1.)     No  1  has  right  over  No  2  G  to  X. 

If  the  second-named  train  reaches  the  point 
last  named  before  the  other  arrives,  it  may  pro- 
ceed, keeping  clear  of  the  opposing  train  as  many 
minutes  as  such  train  was  before  required  to 
clear  it  under  the  rules.  If  the  first-named  train 
is  met  between  the  designated  points,  the  con- 
ductor of  the  second-named  train  must  inform  it 
of  his  arrival. 

74 


(2.)     Extra  37  east  has  right  over  No  3  F  to  A~ 
The  regular  train  must  not  go  beyond  the  point 
last  named  until  the  extra  train  has  arrived,  un- 
less directed  by  train  order  to  do  so. 


These  orders  give  right  to  the  train  first  named 
over  the  other  train  between  the  points  named. 
If  the  trains  meet  at  either  of  the  designated 
points,  the  first-named  train  must  take  the  siding, 
unless  the  order  otherwise  prescribes. 

E. 
Time  Orders. 

(1.)     No  1  run  fifty  50  mins  late  A  to  G. 

This  makes  the  schedule  time  of  the  train 
named,  between  the  stations  mentioned,  as  much 
later  as  stated  in  the  order,  and  any  other  train 
receiving  the  order  is  required  to  run  with  respect 
to  this  later  time,  as  before  required  to  run  with 
respect  to  the  regular  schedule  time.  The  time 
in  the  order  should  be  such  as  can  be  easily  added 
to  the  schedule  time. 


(2.)  No  1  run  fifty  50  mins  late  A  to  G  and 
twenty  20  mins  late  G  to  K,  etc. 

This  makes  the  schedule  time  of  the  train 
named,  between  the  stations  mentioned,  as  much 
later  as  stated  in  the  order,  and  any  other  train 
receiving  the  order  is  required  to  run  with  respect 
to  this  later  time  as  before  required  to  run  with 
respect  to  the  regular  schedule  time.  The  time 
in  the  order  should  be  such  as  can  be  easily  added 
to  the  schedule  time. 

75 


(3.)  No  1  wait  at  H  until  nine  fifty  nine  9  59 
a  m  for  No  2. 

The  train  first  named  must  not  pass  the  desig- 
nated point  before  the  time  given,  unless  the  other 
train  has  arrived.  The  train  last  named  is  re- 
quired to  run  with  respect  to  the  time  specified, 
at  the  designated  point  or  any  intermediate 
station  where  schedule  time  is  earlier  than  the 
time  specified  in  the  order,  as  before  required  to 
run  with  respect  to  the  schedule  time  of  the  train 
first  named. 


(4.)     Nos  1  and  3  wait  at  N  until  nine  fifty  nine 

9  59  am. 

P  until  ten  thirty  10  30  am. 
R  until  ten  fifty  five  10  55  am  etc. 
The  train,  or  trains,  named  must  not  pass  the 
•designated  points  before  the  times  given.      Other 
trains  receiving  the  order  are  required  to  run 
with  respect  to  the  time  specified  at  the  desig- 
nated points  or  any  intermediate  station  where 
schedule  time  is  earlier  than  the  time  specified  in 
the  order  as  before  required  to  run  with  respect 
to  the  schedule  time  of  the  train,  or  trains,  named. 

F. 

For  Sections. 
F — For  Sections. 

(1.)  Eng  20  display  signals  and  run  as  First 
1  A  to  Z. 

To  be  used  when  the  number  of  the  engine  for 
which  signals  are  displayed  is  unknown,  and  is  to 
be  followed  by  (2),  both  being  single-order  ex- 
amples. 

76 


(2.)     Eng  25  run  as  Second  1  A  to  Z. 


(3.)     No  1  display  signals  A  to  G  for  Eng  65. 
Second  1  display  signals  B  to  E  for  Eng  99. 


(4.)     Engs  20  25  and  99  run  as  First  Second 
and  Third  1  A  to  Z. 


To  add  an  intermediate  section  (5)  will  be  used. 

(5.)  Eng  85  display  signals  and  run  as  Second 
1  A  to  Z.  Following  sections  change  numbers 
accordingly. 

The  engine  named  will  display  signals  and  run 
as  directed,  and  following  sections  will  take  the 
next  higher  number. 


To  drop  an  intermediate  section,  (6)  will  be 
used. 

(6.)  Eng  85  is  withdrawn  as  Second  1  at  H. 
Following  sections  change  numbers  accordingly. 

The  engine  named  will  drop  out  at  H,  and  fol- 
lowing sections  will  take  the  next  lower  number. 


To  substitute   one  engine   for  another   on   a 
section,  (7)  will  be  used. 

(7.)     Eng  18  instead  of  Eng  85  display  signals 
and  run  as  Second  1  R  to  Z. 

The  second-named  engine  will  drop  out  at  R^ 
arid  be  replaced  by  the  first-named  engine. 

If  the  second-named  engine  is  the  last  section, 
the  words  " display  signals  and'7  will  be  omitted. 
Following  sections  need  not  be  addressed 
77 


To  discontinue  the  display  of  signals,  (8)  will 
l>e  used. 

(8.)     Second  1  take  down  signals  at  D. 

The  train  named  will  take  down  signals  as 
directed,  and  a  following  section  must  not  pro- 
ceed beyond  the  designated  point. 


To  pass  one  section  by  another,  (9)  will  be 
used. 

(9.)  Engs  99  and  25  reverse  positions  as 
Second  and  Third  1  H  to  Z. 

Conductors  and  enginemen  of  the  trains  ad- 
dressed will  exchange  orders  and  signals.  Follow- 
ing sections,  if  any,  need  not  be  addressed. 

Each  section  affected  by  these  orders  must 
have  copies,  and  must  arrange  signals  accordingly. 

To  annul  a  section  for  which  signals  have  been 
displayed  over  a  division,  or  any  part  thereof 
when  no  train  is  to  follow  the  signals,  Form  K 
must  be  used. 

When  sections  are  run  to  an  intermediate  point 
of  a  schedule,  the  train  orders  must  specify  which 
section  or  sections  shall  assume  the  schedule 
beyond  such  point. 

G. 

Extra  Trains. 

(1.)     Eng  99  run  extra  A  to  F. 
After  Extra  75  arrives  at  F  Eng  99  run  Extra 
F  to  A. 

(2.)     Eng  99  run  extra  A  to  F  and  return  to  C. 
The  extra  must  go  to  F  before  returning  to  C. 
78 


H. 

Work  Extra 

(1.)  Eng  292  works  extra  six  forty  five  6  1+5 
a  m  until  five  forty  five  5  4$  P  m  between 
D  and  E. 

The  work  extra  must,  whether  standing  or 
moving,  protect  itself  against  extras  within  the 
working  limits  in  both  directions  as  prescribed  by 
the  rules.  The  time  of  regular  trains  must  be 
cleared. 

This  may  be  modified  by  adding: 

(2.)  Not  protecting  against  eastward  extra 
trains. 

The  work  extra  will  protect  only  against  west- 
ward extra  trains.  The  time  of  regular  trains 
must  be  cleared. 

(3.)     Not  protecting  against  extra  trains. 
Protection  against  extra  trains  is  not  required. 
The  time  of  regular  trains  must  be  cleared. 


When  a  work  extra  has  been  instructed  by  order 
to  not  protect  against  extra  trains,  and,  after- 
ward, it  is  desired  to  have  it  clear  the  track  for, 
or  protect  itself  after  a  certain  hour  against  a 
designated  extra,  an  order  may  be  given  in  the 
following  form: 

(4.)  Work  Extra  292  clears,  or  protects  against, 
Extra  76  east  between  D  and  E  after  two  ten 
2  10  p  m. 

Extra  76  east  must  not  enter  the  working  limits 
before  2  10  p  m.,  and  will  then  run  expecting  to 

79 


find  the  work  extra  clear  of  the  main  track,  or 
protecting  itself,  as  the  order  may  require. 

To  enable  a  work  extra  to  work  upon  the  time 
of  a  regular  train,  the  following  form  will  be  used : 

(5.)  Work  Extra  292  protects  against  No  55, 
or class  trains,  between  D  and  E. 

The  work  extra  may  work  upon  the  time  of  the 
train  or  trains  mentioned  in  the  order,  and  must 
protect  itself  against  such  train  or  trains.  The 
regular  train  or  trains  receiving  the  order  will  run 
expecting  to  find  the  work  extra  protecting  itself. 


When  a  work  extra  is  to  be  given  exclusive  right 
over  all  trains  the  following  form  will  be  used: 

(6.)  Work  Extra  292  has  right  over  all  trains 
between  D  and  E  seven  fifteen  7  15  p  m  until  one 
fifteen  1  15  am. 

This  gives  the  work  extra  the  exclusive  right 
between  the  points  designated  between  the  times 
named. 

Work  extras  must  give  way  to  all  trains  as 
promptly  as  practicable. 

Whenever  extra  trains  are  run  over  working 
limits,  they  must  be  given  a  copy  of  the  order 
sent  to  the  work  extra.  Should  the  working 
order  instruct  a  work  extra  to  not  protect  against 
extra  trains  in  one  or  both  directions,  extra  trains 
must  protect  against  the  work  extra;  if  the  order 
indicates  that  the  work  extra  is  protecting  itself 
against  other  trains,  they  will  run  expecting  to 
find  the  work  extra  protecting  itself. 

80 


The  working  limits  should  be  as  short  as  practic- 
able; to  be  changed  as  the  progress  of  the  work 
may  require. 

D-H. 

Work  Extra. 

(1.)  Eng  292  works  extra  on  eastward  track,  or 
both  tracks,  six  forty  five  6  45  am  until  five 
forty  five  5  45  p  m  between  D  and  E. 

The  work  extra  must,  whether  standing  or 
moving,  protect  itself  within  the  working 
limits  against  extras  moving  with  the  current 
of  traffic  on  the  track  or  tracks  named.  The 
time  of  regular  trains  must  be  cleared. 


This  form  may  be  modified  by  adding: 
(2.)     Not  protecting  against  extra  trains. 

Protection  against  extra  trains  is  not  re- 
quired. The  time  of  regular  trains  must  be 
cleared. 

To  enable  a  work  extra  to  work  upon  the 
time  of  a  regular  train,  the  following  form  may 
be  used: 

(3.)     Work  extra  292  protects  against  No.  55,  or 
—  class  trains,  betiveen  D  and  E. 

The  work  extra  may  work  upon  the  time 
of  the  train  or  trains  mentioned  in  the  order 
and  must  protect  against  such  train  or  trains* 

The  regular  train  or  trains  receiving  the 
order  will  run  expecting  to  find  the  work  extra 
protecting  itself. 

When  it  is  desired  to  move  a  train  against 
the  current  of  traffic  over  the  working  limits, 
provision  must  be  made  for  the  protection  of 
such  movement. 


When  a  work  extra  is  to  be  given  exclusive 
right  over  all  trains,  the  following  form  will  be 
used: 

81 


(4.)  Work  extra  292  has  right  over  all  trains  on 
eastivard  and  westward  tracks  between  G 
and  H  seven  one  7  01  p  m  until  one  one 
1  01  a  m. 

This  gives  the  work  extra  the  exclusive  right 
to  the  track,  or  tracks,  mentioned  between  the 
points  designated  between  the  times  named. 


Work  extras  must  give  way  to  all  trains  as  prompt- 
ly as  practicable. 

The  working  limits  should  be  as  short  as  practic- 
able; to  be  changed  as  the  progress  of  the  work  may 
require. 

J. 
Holding  Order. 

Hold  No  2. 

Hold  all,  or  eastward,  trains. 

When  a  train  has  been  so  held  it  must  not  pro- 
ceed until  the  order  to  hold  is  annulled,  or  an 
order  given  to  the  operator  in  the  form : 

may  go. 

These  orders  will  be  addressed  to  the  operator 
and  acknowledged  in  the  usual  manner,  and  will 
be  delivered  to  conductors  and  enginemen  of  all 
trains  affected. 

Form  J  will  be  used  only  when  necessary  to 
hold  trains  until  orders  can  be  given,  or  in  case 
of  emergency. 

K. 
Annulling  a  Schedule  or  a  Section. 

No  1  due  to  leave  A  Feb  29th  is  annulled  A  to  Z. 
Second  5  due  to  leave  E  Feb  29ih  is  annulled 
E  to  G. 

82 


The  schedule  or  section  annulled  becomes  void 
between  the  points  named  and  cannot  be  re- 
stored. 

L. 

Annulling  an  Order. 

When  addressed  to  a  train  (1)  will  be  used. 

(1.)     Order  No  10  is  annulled. 

When  addressed  to  an  operator  (2)  or  (3)  will 
be  used. 

(2.)     Order  No  12  to  C  &  E  No  2  is  annulled. 

(3.)  Provided  No  1  has  arrived  at  "(?,"  order 
No  12  to  C  &  E  No  2  is  annulled. 

If  ail  order  which  is  to  be  annulled  has  not 
been  delivered  to  a  train,  the  annulling  order  will 
be  addressed  to  the  operator,  who  will  destroy  all 
copies  of  the  order  annulled  but  his  own,  and 
write  on  that : 

Annulled  by  Order  No . 

An  order  which  has  been  annulled  must  not  be 
reissued  under  its  original  number. 

M. 

Annulling  Part  of  an  Order. 

That  part  of  Order  No  10  reading  No  1 
meet  No  2  at  S  is  annulled. 


That  part  of  Order  No  12  reading  No  3  pass 
No  1  at  S  is  annulled. 

D-M. 
Annulling  Part  of  an  Order. 

That  part  of  Order  No  10  reading  Extra  26S 
west  pass  No  1  at  S  is  annulled. 

That  part  of  Order  No  12  reading  No  3  pass 
No  1  at  S  is  annulled. 

83 


p. 

Superseding  an  Order  or  a  Part  of  an  Order. 
This  order  will  be  given  by  adding  to  prescribed 

forms  the  words  "  instead  of ." 

(1.)     No  1  meet  No  2  at  C  instead  of  B. 


(2.)     No  3  pass  No  1  at  D  instead  of  C. 


(3.)  No  1  has  right  over  No  2  G  to  R  instead 
ofX.  

(4.)  No  1  display  signals  for  Eng  85  A  to  Z 
instead  of  G. 

An  order  which  has  been  superseded  must  not 
be  reissued  under  its  original  number. 

When  a  train  is  directed  by  train  order  to  take 
siding,  for  another  train,  such  instructions  apply 
only  at  the  point  named  in  that  order,  and  do  not 
apply  to  the  superseding  order  unless  so  specified. 

D-P. 

Superseding  an  Order  or  a  Part  of  an  Order. 
This  order  will  be  given  by  adding  to  prescribed 
forms,  the  words  "instead  of -." 

(1.)     No  1  pass  No  3  at  C  instead  of  B. 


(2.)     No  1  display  signals  for  Eng  85  A  to  Z 
instead  of  G. 

An  order  which  has  been  superseded  must  not  be 
reissued  under  its  original  number. 

D-R. 

Providing  for  a  Movement  Against  the  Current 
of  Traffic. 

(1.)     No  1  has  right  over  opposing  trains  on 
No  2,  or  eastward,  track  C  to  F. 

84 


The  designated  train  must  use  the  track  specified 
between  the  points  named  and  has  right  over  oppos- 
ing trains  on  that  track  between  those  points. 
Opposing  trains  must  not  leave  the  point  last  named 
until  the  designated  train  arrives. 

An  inferior  train  between  the  points  named  mov- 
ing with  the  current  of  traffic  in  the  same  direction 
as  the  designated  train  must  receive  the  copy  of  the 
order,  and  may  then  proceed  on  its  schedule,  or 
right. 

This  order  may  be  modified  as  follows: 

(2.)  After  No  4  arrives  at  C  No  1  has  right 
over  opposing  trains  on  No  2,  or  eastward,  track 
CtoF. 

The  train  to  be  moved  against  the  current  of 
traffic  must  not  leave  the  first-named  point  until 
the  arrival  of  the  first-named  train. 

A  train  must  not  be  moved  against  the  current  of 
traffic  until  the  track  on  which  it  is  to  run  has  been 
cleared  of  opposing  trains. 

D-S. 

Providing  for  the  Use  of  a  Section  of  Double 
Track  as  Single  Track. 

No  1,  or  westward,  track  will  be  used  as  single 
track  between  F  and  G. 


If  it  is  desired  to  limit  the  time  for  such  use, 
add  from  one  naught  one  1  01  pmto  three  naught 
one  3  01  p  m.  

All  trains  must  use  the  track  specified  between 
the  stations  named  and  will  be  governed  by  rules 
for  single  track. 

Trains  running  against  the  current  of  traffic  on 
the  track  named  must  be  clear  of  the  track  at  the 
expiration  of  the  time  named,  or  protected  as 
prescribed  by  Rule  99. 

85 


RULES  GOVERNING  THE  MOVEMENT  OF 

TRAINS  WITH  THE  CURRENT  OF 

TRAFFIC  ON  TWO  OR  MORE 

TRACKS  BY  BLOCK 

SIGNALS 

Bun  by  D-251.     On  portions  of  the  road  so  specified  on 

signals.         the  time-table,  trains  will  run  with  the  current  of 

traffic    by    block    signals    whose    indications    will 

supersede  time-table  superiority. 

Movement         D-252.     The  movement  of  trains  will  be  super- 
supervised.    Vj8e(i  5^  the  chief  train  dispatcher,  who  will  issue 

instructions  to  signalmen  when  required. 
obtain  D-253.    A  train  having  work  to  do  which  may 

permission  detain  it  more  than  ten  minutes,  must  obtain 
permission  from  the  signalman  at  the  last  station 
at  which  there  is  a  siding  before  entering  the  block 
in  which  work  is  to  be  done.  The  signalman  must 
obtain  authority  to  give  this  permission  from  the 
chief  train  dispatcher. 

Train  D-254.    Except  as  affected  by  Rules  D-251  to  D-253, 

maS   in"      oil  Block  Signal  Rules  and  Train  Rules  remain  in 
force  force. 


RULES  GOVERNING  THE  MOVEMENT  OF  TRAINS 

AGAINST  THE  CURRENT  OF  TRAFFIC  ON  TWO 

OR  MORE  TRACKS  BY  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 

nun   by  D-261.     On  portions  of  the  road  so  specified  on  the 

signals.         time-table,  trains  will  run  against  the  current  of 

traffic    by    block    signals,    whose    indications    will 

supersede  time-table  superiority  and  will  take  the 

place  of  train  orders. 

interlocking  D-261a.  On  portions  of  the  road  where  trains 
st5>altrains  are  run  affa^ns^  ^ne  current  of  traffic  by  block 
for  orders.  8ignai8f  interlocking  signals  may  be  used  as  block 

signals. 

86 


D-262.     The  movement  of  trains  will  be  super-  Movement 

supervised. 

vised  by  the  chief  train  dispatcher,  who  will  issue 
instructions  to  signalmen. 

D-263.    A  train  must  not  cross  over,  except  as^S?"1* 
provided  in  Rule  D-261,    without  authority   from 
the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

D-264.     Except  as  affected  by  Rules  D-261  to  D-263,  giodc  ^nd 
all  Block  Signal  Rules  and  Train  Rules  remain  in  m  force. 
force. 


ADDITIONAL  RULES  FOR  THREE  OR  MORE 
TRACKS. 


F-271.     The  main  tracks  shall  be  designated  Tracks. 

how    des- 

by  numerals,  and  their  use  indicated  by  special ignated> 
instructions. 

F-272.     On  portions  of  the  road  so  specified  on  *™kby 
the  time-table,  trains  will  run  with  the  current  of signals- 
traffic  by  block  signals,  whose  indications  will 
supersede  time-table  superiority. 

F-272a.     On  portions  of  the  road  so  specified  Run  WHU- 

*  out    orders. 

on  the  time-table,  or  by  special  instructions, 
extra  trains  will  run  with  the  current  of  traffic 
without  train  orders. 

XF-273.     A  train  by  night  running  with  t 
current  of  traffic,  on  an  express  track,  will  display 
two  red  lights  to  the  rear. 

A  train  by  night  running  with  the  current  of 
traffic,  on  a  local  track,  will  display  a  green  light 
to  the  rear  on  the  side  next  to  an  express  track  in 
the  direction  of  the  current  of  traffic,  and  a  red 
light  on  the  opposite  side. 

87 


A  train  by  night  using  any  track  against  the 
current  of  traffic  will  display  two  green  lights  to 
the  rear,  one  on  each  side,  with  a  red  light  on  the 
platform  or  cupola. 

A  train  by  night  on  a  siding  will  display  two 
green  lights  to  the  rear. 

See  diagrams. 

:.    ENGINE  AND  MOTOR  WHISTLE  SIGNALS. 

NOTE. — The  signals  prescribed  are  illustrated  by  "o"  for  short 

sounds;  " "  for  longer  sounds.     The  sound  of  the  whistle  should 

be  distinct,  with  intensity  and  duration  proportionate  to  the  distance 
signal  is  to  be  conveyed. 


SOUND 

INDICATION 

(a)  - 

Flagman  for  Track  No.   1 

may  return. 

(6)  

Flagman  for  Track   No.  2 

may  return. 

(c)   o 

Flagman  for  Track  No.  3 

may  return. 

(d)    0 

Flagman   for  Track   No.   4 

may  return. 

(0)     0  

Flagman   for  Track  No.  5 

may  return. 

CO  o 

Flagman  for  Track  No.   6 

may  return. 

(0)  o  o 

Flagman  for  Track  No.  7 

may  return. 

(K)  o  o 

Flagman  for  Track  No.  8 

may  return. 

F-275.  Except  as  affected  by  Eules  ^-271  to 
JF-274,  all  Block  Signal  Eules  and  Train  Eules 
for  Double  Track  remain  in  force. 


88 


FORM 

31 

FORM 

UNITED  STATES  RAILROAD  ADMINISTRATION     3] 

CHICAGO  &  NORTH-WESTERN  RAILROAD 

TRAIN  ORDER  No.._W_. 
(Nor.  1,  1916) 

ft 

jf                       (Station) 

To 

X  

(Initials)                   Qpr  •                                   (1.45  A)  fjf 

Conductor  and  Engineman  must  each  have  a  copy  of  this  order. 

Repeated  at 

2.20  A  M 

Conductor 

Train 

Made 

Time 

Opr. 

Jones 

"45" 

Complete 

2.20  AM 

Black 

(To  be  printed  on  yellow  paper) 


89 


FORM 

19 


UNITED  STATES  RAILROAD  ADMINISTRATION 


19 


CHICAGO  &  NORTH  WESTERN  RAILROAD 

TRAIN  ORDER  No. 10. 

April  1,    1916 


To 

fif  (Station) 

To 


X Calais) Qpr.;       L??.A.If 


Conductor  and  Engineman  must  each  have  a  copy  of  this  order. 


ffac/e  Complete  fj^  21QP/H.  Black  Qpr. 


(To  be  printed  on  green  paper) 


90 


i 

«            S3 

2 

L    |    | 

s  4  1 

0                - 

1 

S     a     1 

1 

a.     9 

h 

B 

0   g  1 

<       0 

5 

-   1 

K      < 

| 

£      <» 

h     o 

0 

•1  s 

o)     5 

bo 
ta       ® 

«M                   •« 

Jd      -2 

Z          <      Q 

6 

*5 

i 

^3               '^<J 

1 

i 

|    la 

CQ          ^^i 

••                LL.       oj 

K 

\ 

rrt             P  ° 

S   S  <  ! 

u    0    ^ 

> 

•a 

o 

t-9 

£     II 

Q      co    i.i 

^      u    Hi 

t/ 

E 

a 

"2  §      ~ra  ^ 

*S                           O   rl     SQ 

a  o    ^0 

| 

e* 
1 

O    Q)          I-H  .y   &* 

§  y       z 

1 

u    c3         o"S  "^ 

S^     g|  2 

^i       ^ 
•j       o 

H) 
0) 

S 

^^     |ol 

A 

0 

^*e*          Q^      rt^ 

£ 

«       QJ          •        ^    H 

^£        ^*     •*•       ^ 

*3 

H     rrt   O 

a^             Q         ^ 

DC       •••    ^^      "" 

tf)     ^  UJ    ! 

u   4:  J 

o  0 
<     o 
h      < 
(0      o 

tgineman  ?.?:J.?.  

rs  3-71-98  No  No  1 

> 

4S 

| 

h 
1 

i 

4 

ffect  any  orders  you 

1  Englneman  musi 
in  the  above  for 

i  Card,  Form  A,  is  use 
d  Permissive  Card,  F 

H         o 

w  2  ^  o 

o    £       i 

W     "g 

-d          ° 

V. 

"^ 

|||          W                    Q 

5 

a 
•i 
fc,     « 
o       ^ 

°         09 

2     ^ 

E 

S 

"5 

p 

0 

D 

<      1 

11.111 

illli 

5 

3 

r£          \—  ( 

d 

a 

3 

HS^H 

3 

2    1 

(To  be  printed  on  white  paper) 


91 


0) 

^*  O        o^l 

z 

r- 

o: 

r- 

§ 

o 

n 

t 

•*3           <U  ^ 

•    ^     £4              >   S 

'        ^       °            52 

o 

Pi 

J 

S"S     ^a 

73 

c? 

"S 

>    co  Cu      ^3  e8 

>  'd  3'     «S 

s 

<       Q 

g 

1 

J  §  ™     1® 

DC      < 

g 

!   fl  2      -d? 

i-    2 

'^1  sl 

co    5 

•g 

z    < 

I 

k£     §3 

^    E 

^ 

»>J  -V        ^H  wl 
r-  1     '~L|          ^   H 

f-t      .         e9  r1 

^> 

s'o    «i 

o    i 

g|        §| 

a§     sg   ~ 

<        Ul 

1- 

<f 

* 

O        S  W)     <M" 

FOKM  B. 

TATES  RAILROAD 
AGO  &  NORTH  WES 

CAUTION  C, 

fe 

c 
•  E- 

03 

1 

H3 
PC 

?-,    c 

•2  % 
•S  1  1 

c3      kfl     C 
^    "en      rt 

I! 

«  1 

o3      cc 

P<     c 

a    o  ^ 

O       4^        t 

tj 

1  '^ 

• 

'. 

•; 
' 

Enginemen  receiving1  this  ca 
proceed  with  the  train  unde 

d  on  account  of  failure  of  means  of 
jxt  block  station  in  auvance,  and  the 
jroceed. 
(See  Rules  332-332a  and 

CO     o 

<-\     w 
>3      c 

3         K 

,  • 

rtf    t>,         |«0 

UNITED 
CHI 

i-J        O 

11  g 

H    °   "-5 

03       " 

o  ^  ^ 

Conductors  ar 
signalman,  mi 
r  obstruct  ion. 
When  Form  B  is 
tie  signalman  at  th 
aim  an  permission 

O         .t: 

®  !-?    *"  P 

H          * 

-f^    03        *3  M 

(To  be  printed  on  green  paper) 


92 


• 

d 

z 

r^ 

| 

i 

o 

1 

.5 

i1 

i 

1           T3 

<      Q 

'S 

'fe 

..^ 

J)     e3             5 

DC      < 

rt 

$, 

1             1 

1-    o 

.2 

s     'S 

Wy£ 

.3 

O             *|H 

1 

-^ 

•^           co 

"™*          <•— 

• 

^o           cS 

Z     < 

CO 

a           'S 

Q 

S 

1 

1            I      ^ 

^     z 

(T 

£ 

§ 

S       g    | 

S     c 

< 

4J 

02                   ^H            S 

O     t/) 

0 

5 

M 

*                    £          § 
g                     g            rf 

<     u 

S    °  £ 

UJ 

| 

© 

QJ            co      tl 

c3*           2       co 

K         QL 

Q 

tn 

fc 

H 

i 

1 

fl 

ft       **    f> 

£          be    ^ 

•w             P      co 

<            d 

to 

i 

4 

i 

a 

3     S  s 

f^      O 

j™l^ 

f 

H 

*o8 

c3              0 

«  4 

QL 

cr 

h 

3 
i 

|       C 

e4 

rrt 

^bC              <D       ^ 
oo              *"       5 
ft             fl      W 

u    *o 

UJ 

c 

r- 

5       C 

1 

«     as 

s  i 

Q. 

P 

3 

S 

bo 

.S 

d          .9 

^      w 

(0     2 

o 

1      *& 

0  3 

Id     u 

E 

*5 
i 

& 

1   s 

1                        »v 

Q)                   d 

t      £ 

c3              O 

h 

-*- 

a      -s 

5    ^ 

PL 

Q 

o  ^     £ 

&    Z 

c^ 

|         o 

E3r-.fi 

»    ID 

•O 

C 

) 

o  x»     .P 

C 

) 

o 

E- 

4 

3 

(To  be  printed  on  pink  paper) 


93 


-v 


<i 

S 

> 

z 

r- 

o: 

T— 

1 

08 

I 

S 
> 

o 

3T 

« 

5; 

! 
> 

h 

^a 

c 

f   ^  T3 

<       0 

a 
c 

;  '••      ^ 

J       0    ^ 

DC      < 

i^ 

a 

: 

£  -2 

w    § 

cc 

z    < 

1  5 

<        UJ 

Q     co 

CARD 

^ 

"                i 

4J 
*                         K 

it 

°  3 

-H"       ^         UJ 

S  o    £ 

§     DC 

LU 

s  S   *§ 

"S  °    « 

ill 

£  =*  -| 

to 

CO 

•"*       K            M 

1.9    1 

S  S  v  -:S 

cc    o 

z 

k 

&i  s 

to 

cc 

« 

1 

»" 

>   ' 

»  * 

UJ      ^ 

UJ 

a 

a   9 

|—      o 

a. 

bt 

3 

r 

5  a 

<       0 

1-    < 
W     o 

j 

£ 

> 
)                            t 

e 

1 

£ 

1 

) 

js 

0     0 
UJ      ** 

1    f 

! 
L( 

o3 

&1 

t 

w     I 

|        | 

?| 

z 

D 

«  1 

o     ft 

!     * 

o 

0    0 

o 

o 

H 

3 

(To  be  printed  on  pink  paper) 


94 


(0 

'      1 

b 

I 

f             ? 

j  . 

j 

z 

GP 

r™ 

:       i 

t 

c 

J 

o 

< 

•f! 

^ 

£ 

1- 

< 

e 

u        *g 

^ 

<     a 

UJ 

^C 

i 

DC      < 

h      0 

o 

to    5 

2 

£ 

z    < 

0 

Q  *o 

^> 

rv  r  )  ~~ 

£ 

^-x 

-^       Z 

LJL  ^  u. 

g  1 

Q        DC 

X  x  ^ 

^        CO 

o    -a 

|- 

()   DQ  QC 

.3     § 

O        0) 

<  *~ 

gr 

I    1 

FORM  C-2. 

ATES  RAILROA 
GO  &  NORTH  WE 

PERMISSIVE 

SWITCH,  RE-ENTER 
THE  CURRENT  OF 

& 

H- 

I 
faf 

r 

> 

E 

id 

0 

d 

r^ 
(-1 

0 

•3 
•3 

> 
c 

iy  rights  under  time  table  or  by 
(See  rules  327b,  334,  361,  ae 

r-     < 

DC 

? 

^ 

a 

W     o 

pE 

'J 

0 

Q     Z 

0 

d"    "e 

H 

1 

u     ° 

S     1 

Vi       O 

OS 

1 

H 

0 

*t*        C 

(D 

Z 

K 

<J3    * 

1 

» 

D 

0 

0     M 

® 

i 

h 

§ 

S 

95 


FORM  A-l 

UNITED  STATES  RAILROAD  ADMINISTRATION 

Chicago  &  North  Western  Railroad 
CLEARANCE  CARD. 

Dover  .?..!:?.  AM  March  21  ]Q    16 

Conductor  and  Engineman NO.  12 

I   have  no  orders  for  your  train. 

Last  train  ahead  left  at 

(John  Jones) 

.  SIGNALMAN. 

This  does  not  affect  any  orders  you  may  have  received. 

Conductor  and  Engineman  must   each  have   a  copy,  and  see 
that  their  train  is  correctly  designated  in  the  above  form. 

(See  Rule  91b.) 
(To  be  printed  on  white  paper,  green  letters) 


96 


Form  1015 

UNITED  STATES  RAILROAD  ADMINISTRATION 
Chicago  &  North  Western  Railroad 

TRAIN  REGISTER  CHECK, 

Train  Register  at..- ~ 

Checked  by Conductor. 

Train 19 

At M. 


Train 


Arrive 


Depart 


Signals 


Before  leaving  any  register  station  conductor  must  enter  on 
this  blank  all  trains  affecting  his  rights,  and  personally  deliver  to 
engineman.  Engineman  will  not  leave  any  register  station  with- 
out it,  and  must  satisfy  himself  that  no  train  affecting  his  right 
to  proceed  is  omitted.  See  Rule  83c. 

(To  be  printed  on  white  paper) 


97 


RUL-E© 

FOR 

BLOCK  SIGNALING 

AND 

INTERLOCKING 


BLOCK  SIGNALING. 


DEFINITIONS 

BLOCK. — A  length  of  track  of  defined  limits, 
the  use  of  which  by  trains  is  governed  by  block 
signals. 

BLOCK  STATION. — A  place  from  which  block 
signals  are  operated. 

FIXED  SIGNAL. — A  signal  of  fixed  location, 
indicating  a  condition  affecting  the  movement 
of  a  train. 

BLOCK  SIGNAL. — A  fixed  signal  governing  the 
use  of  a  block. 

HOME  BLOCK  SIGNAL. — A  fixed  signal  at  the 
entrance  of  a  block  to  govern  trains  in  entering 
and  using  that  block. 

DISTANT  BLOCK  SIGNAL. — A  fixed  signal  used 
in  connection  with  a  Home  Block  Signal  to  govern 
the  approach  thereto. 

BLOCK  SYSTEM. — A  series  of  consecutive  blocks. 

MANUAL  BLOCK  SYSTEM. — A  series  of  con- 
secutive blocks,  governed  by  block  signals 
operated  manually,  upon  information  by  tele- 
graph, telephone  or  other  means  of  communica- 
tion, 

AUTOMATIC  BLOCK  SYSTEM. — A  series  of  con- 
secutive blocks  governed  by  block  signals  operated 
by  electric,  pneumatic  or  other  agency  actuated 
by  a  train,  or  by  certain  conditions  affecting  the 
use  of  a  block. 

100 


POSITIVE  BLOCK. — Where  only  one 'train.' 'is4 
allowed  in  a  block. 

PERMISSIVE  BLOCK. — Where  more  than  one 
train  is  allowed  in  a  block. 

TIME  SPACING. — A  method  of  spacing  trains 
an  interval  of  time. 

INTERMEDIATE  SIDING. — (1)  A  siding  between 
block  stations:  (2)  A  siding  where  block  office 
is  closed. 

As  the  safety  of  trains  largely  depends  on  the 
proper  observance  of  signals  and  that  they  are 
controlled  in  accordance  with  the  indications 
given,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  em- 
ployes having  anything  to  do  with  the  operation 
of  trains  be  perfectly  familiar  with  the  meaning 
of  the  signals.  All  such  employes  will  be  re- 
quired to  attend  the  school  of  instruction,  held 
in  the  Company's  signal  instruction  car. 


MANUAL  BLOCK  SYSTEM. 

REQUISITES  OF  INSTALLATION. 

1.  Signals  of  prescribed  form,  the  indications 
given  by  not  more  than  three  positions;  by  lights 
of  prescribed  color;  or  by  both. 

2.  The  apparatus  so  constructed  that  the  failure 
of  any  part  controlling  the  operation  of  a  signal 
will  cause  it  to  display  its  most  restrictive  indi- 
cation. 

3.  Signals  located  preferably  over  or  upon  the 
right  of  and  adjoining  the  track  to  which  they 

101 


refer.  For  less  than  three  tracks  signals  for 
trains  in  each  direction  may  be  on  the  same 
signal  mast. 

4.  Semaphore  arms  that  govern,  displayed  to 
the  right  of  the  signal  mast  as  seen  from  an 
approaching  train. 

5.  The    normal    indication    of    Home    Block 
Signals — Stop. 


RULES 

Two-Position  Home  Block  Signals 


INDICATION  —  STOP. 

NAME  —  STOP-SIGNAL. 

302  A. 


102 


Two-Position  Home  Block  Signals 


INDICATION  —  PROCEED. 

NAME  —  CLEAR- SIGNAL. 

302  C. 


305.  Block  signals  govern  the  use  of  the  blocks, 
but,  unless  otherwise  provided,  do  not  supersede 
the  superiority  of  trains;  nor  dispense  with  the 
use  or  the  observance  of  other  signals  whenever 
and  wherever  they  may  be  required. 

305a.  Block  signals  may  also  be  used  as  train 
order  signals. 

The  district  in  which  trains  are  to  be  governed 
by  block  signals  will  be  defined  by  time-table  or 
special  instructions. 

103 


306.  When  a  block  station  is  open  at  an 
irregular  hour,  trains  must  be  notified  by  train 
order  or  by  special  instructions,  and  special 
precautions  must  be  taken  to  call  the  attention 
of  trains  approaching  such  block  station  to  the 
indications  of  the  block  signals. 

SIGNALMEN. 

311.  The  normal  indication  of  Home  Block 
Signals — Stop. 

312.  Signals  must  be  operated  carefully  and 
with  a  uniform  movement.     If  a  signal  fails  to 
work  properly  its  operation  must  be  discontinued 
and  the  signal  secured  so  as  to  display  its  most 
restrictive  indication  until  repaired. 

313.  Signalmen  must  observe,  as  far  as  prac- 
ticable, whether  the  indications  of  the  signals 
correspond  with  the  positions  of  the  levers. 

314.  Signalmen   must   not   make   nor   permit 
any  unauthorized  repairs,   alterations   or  addi- 
tions to  the  apparatus. 

315.  A  block  record  must  be  kept  at  each  block 
station. 

315a.  Signalmen  will  properly  record  trains, 
beginning  at  12:01  a.  m.  daily,  on  block  record. 

When  a  train  is  passed  by  another  at  a  block 
station  it  must  be  re-entered  upon  the  block 
record. 

The  last  train  entering  or  leaving  a  block  must 
be  the  last  recorded. 

104 


3156.  If  authority  to  enter  a  block  has  been 
given  it  must  be  withdrawn  before  cancelling 
the  block.  This  will  be  done  as  follows: 

"Cancel  block  for ." 

Answered  by: 

"Block  for—     cancelled." 

Both  signalmen  will  enter  cancellation  as  above 
on  block  record  opposite  number  of  train  for 
which  block  is  cancelled. 

316.  COMMUNICATING  CODE. 

1 — Display  Stop-signal. 
13 — I  understand. 

17 — Display  Stop-signal.     Train  following. 
2 — Block  clear. 

3 — Block  wanted  for  train  other  than  pas- 
senger. 

36 — Block  wanted  for  passenger  train. 
4 — Train  other  than  passenger  has  entered 

block. 

46 — Passenger  train  has  entered  block. 
5 — Block  is  not  clear  of  train  other  than  pas- 
senger. 

56 — Block  is  not  clear  of  passenger  train. 
7 — Train  following. 
8 — Opening  block  station.     Answer  by  record 

of  trains  in  the  extended  block. 
9 — Closing  block  station.     Answer  by  13. 
When  two  or  more  tracks  are  used  in  the  same 
direction,  signalmen  in  using  the  communicating 
code  must  also  specify  the  track. 
105 


316a.  When  the  telephone  is  used  the  code 
will  be  used  without  the  numerals.  Numbers 
and  direction  after  being  given  will  be  spelled  out 
letter  by  letter. 

317.  To  admit  a  train  to  a  block,  the  signalman 
must  examine  the  block  record,  and,  if  the  block 

is  clear,  give  "1  for "  to  the  next  block 

station  in  advance.  The  signalman  receiving 
this  signal,  if  the  block  is  clear,  must  display  the 
Stop-signal  to  opposing  trains  and  reply  "  2  for 

."     If  the  block  is  not  clear,   he  must 

reply  "5  of ,"  or  "56  of  —     — ."     The 

signalman  at  the  entrance  of  the  block  must  then 
display  the  proper  signal  indication. 

A  train  must  not  be  admitted  to  a  block  which 
is  occupied  by  an  opposing  train  or  by  a  passenger 
train,  except  as  provided  in  Rule  332  or  by  train 
order. 

To  permit  a  train  to  follow  a  train  other  than 
a  passenger  train  into  a  block,  the  signalman  must 

give  "  17  for "  to  the  next  block  station  in 

advance.  The  signalman  receiving  this  signal,  if 
there  is  no  passenger  train  in  the  block,  must 
reply  "5  of 13  for . "  The  approach- 
ing train  will  then  be  admitted  to  the  block  with 
Permissive  Card  (Form  C). 

317a.  A  train  may  be  permitted  to  enter  a 
block  that  is  not  clear  under  following  conditions : 

1.  When  trains  are  to  meet  at  an  inter- 
mediate siding  each  must  receive  a  Permissive 
Card  (Form  C-l). 

106 


2.  When  trains  are  to  meet  at  a  station  where 
the  entire  siding  is  in  advance  of  block  signal,  or 
when  a  train  is  at  a  station  awaiting  arrival  of  an 
opposing  train,  and  it  is   desired   that  it  shall 
depart  promptly  when  opposing  train  has  arrived 
and  cleared  the  switch,  signalman  may  issue  a 
Permissive  Card  (Form  C-l). 

3.  When  a  train   enters   a   block   by   clear 
signal  indication  and  fails  to  clear  it  as  intended 
for  a  superior  train,  trains  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion,  by  a  Permissive  Train  Order  as  prescribed  by 
Rule  317&. 

4.  For  a  following  movement,  a  passenger 
train  by  Permissive  Train  Order,  except  as  pro- 
vided in  Rule  332. 

317&.  Permissive  Card  (Form  C)  will  only  be 
issued  when  authorized  by  the  chief  train  dis- 
patcher on  the  following  form : 

"To ." 

"Issue  Permissive  Card  (Form  C)  No. 

to  ." 

This  will  be  sent,  repeated  and  complete  given 
in  the  manner  prescribed  for  train  orders,  and 
entered  in  train  dispatcher's  train  order  book. 

Permissive  train  order  will  be  issued  by  traia 
dispatcher  on  Form  31  in  the  following  form: 

"To  CandE ." 

"You  may  proceed  from to prepared  to 

stop  short  of  train  or  obstruction,  account ." 

318.  To  admit  a  train  to  a  block,  the  signal- 
man must  examine  the  block  record,  and,  if  the 
block  is  clear,  give  "3  for ,"  or  "36  for 

107 


,"  to  the  next  block  station  in  advance. 

The  signalman  receiving  this  signal,  if  the  block 

is  clear,  must  reply  "2  for ."     If  the  block 

is  not  clear,  he  must  reply  "5  of ,"  or  "56 

of ."  The  signalman  at  the  entrance  of  the 

block  must  then  display  the  proper  signal  indica- 
tion. 

A  train  must  not  be  admitted  to  a  block  unless 
it  is  clear,  except  as  provided  in  Rule  332  or  by 
train  order. 

319.  When  a  train  enters  a  block,  the  signal- 
man must  give  "4 ,"  or  "46  — — — •"  and 

the  time,  to  the  next  block   station  in  advance, 
and  when  the  train  has  passed  the  Home  Block 
Signal  and  the  signalman  has  seen  the  markers 
he  must  display  the  Stop-signal,  and  when  the 
rear  of  the  train  has  passed  300  feet  beyond  the 
Home  Block  Signal,  he  must  give  the  record  of 
the  train  to  the  next  block  station  in  the  rear. 

This  information  must  be  entered  on  the  block 
records. 

320.  Unless    otherwise    provided,     signalmen 
must  not  ask  for  the  block  until  they  have  re- 
ceived a  report  of  the  train  from  the  next  block 
station  in  the  rear. 

321.  Signalmen  must  observe  all  passing  trains 
and  note  whether  they  are  complete  and  in  order, 
and  the  markers  properly  displayed. 

322.  Should  a  train  pass  a  block  station  with 
any   indication   of   conditions   endangering   the 
train,  or  a  train  on  another  track,  the  signalman 
must  immediately  notify  the  signalman  at  the 

108 


next  block  station  in  advance,  and  each  must 
display  Stop-signals  to  all  trains  that  may  be 
affected,  and  must  not  permit  any  train  to  pro- 
ceed until  it  is  known  that  its  track  is  not 
obstructed. 

323.  Should  a  train  pass  a  block  station  with- 
out markers,  the  signalman  must  notify  the  signal- 
man at  the  next  block  station  in  each  direction,, 
and  must  not  report  that  train  clear  of  the  block 
until  he  has  ascertained  that  the  train  is  com- 
plete. 

324.  Should  a  train  pass  a  block  station  in  two 
or  more  parts,  the  signalman  must  stop  all  trains 
moving  in  the  same  direction  and  notify  the 
signalman  at  the  next  block  station  in  advance, 
A  signalman  having  received  this  notice  must 
stop  all  trains  moving  in  the  opposite  direction. 
The  Stop-signal  must  not  be  displayed  to  the 
engineman  of  the  parted  train  if  the  train  can 
be  admitted  to  the  block  in  advance  under  Block 
Signal  Rules;  but  the  Train-parted  Signal  must 
be  given.     Should  a  train  in  either  direction  be 
stopped,  it  may  be  permitted  to  proceed  when  it 
is  known  that  its  track  is  not  obstructed. 

325.  A  signalman  informed  of  any  obstruction 
in  a  block  must  immediately  notify  the  signalman 
at  the  other  end  of  the  block  and  each  must  dis- 
play  Stop-signals   to   all   trains   that   may   be 
affected  and  must  not  permit  any  train  to  proceed 
until  it  is  known  that  its  track  is  not  obstructed. 

326.  When  a  train  takes  a  siding  the  signalman 
must  know  that  it  is  clear  of  the  block  before 

109 


giving  2  or  displaying  a  Clear-signal  for  that 
block. 

The  signalman  must  obtain  control  of  the 
block  before  permitting  a  train  on  a  siding  to 
re-enter  the  block. 

327.  To  permit  a  train  to  cross  over  or  return, 
unless  otherwise  provided,  the  signalman  must 
examine  the  block  record,  and  if  all  the  blocks 
affected  are  clear  of  approaching  trains  he  must 
arrange  with  the  signalman  at  the  next  block 
station  in  each  direction  to  protect  the  movement, 
and  when  the  proper  signals  have  been  displayed 
permission  may  be  given.  Until  the  block  is 
clear  no  train  must  be  admitted  in  the  direction 
of  the  cross-over  switches  except  under  Per- 
missive-signal or  with  Permissive  Card  (Form  G). 

All  cross-over  movements  must  be  entered  on 
the  block  records. 

327a.  To  permit  a  train  to  do  switching  or 
re-enter  a  block,  the  signalman  must  examine  the 
block  record,  and  if  the  blocks  affected  are  clear 
of  approaching  trains  he  must  arrange  with  the 
signalman  at  the  next  block  station  in  each  direc- 
tion to  protect  the  movement,  and  when  the 
proper  signals  have  been  displayed  permission 
may  be  given.  Until  the  block  is  clear  no  train 
must  be  admitted  in  the  direction  of  these  move- 
ments except  with  Permissive  Card  (Form  C). 
All  such  movements  must  be  entered  on  the  block 
records. 

3276.  When  the  proper  signals  have  been 
displayed  for  a  cross-over  movement,  a  switch- 
ing movement,  or  a  movement  to  re-enter  the 
110 


block,  the  signalman  may  issue  Permissive  Card 
(Form  C-2),  which  must  be  taken  up  before 
block  is  released. 

328.  When  coupled  trains  are  separated,   as 
prescribed   by   Rule   364,   the   signalman   must 
regard  each  portion  as  an  independent  train. 

329.  If  necessary  to  stop  a  train  for  which  a 
Clear  Home  Block  Signal  has  been  displayed  and 
accepted,  the  signalman  must  give  hand  signals  in 
addition  to  displaying  the  Stop-signal. 

329a.  A  signalman  will  not  accept  "  1"  requir- 
ing him  to  hold  a  train  that  has  been  given  a 
clear  block,  after  the  engine  has  once  passed 
the  signal,  until  the  train  has  been  stopped  and 
the  conductor  and  engineman  notified. 

330.  A  signalman  having  train  orders  for  a 
train  must  display  the  block  signal  at  Stop.     He 
may  permit  trains  so  stopped  to  proceed  under 
Block  Signal  Rules  after  complying  with  Rules 
for  Movement  by  Train  Orders. 

330a.  When  there  are  no  train  orders  and  the 
block  in  advance  has  been  obtained,  the  proper 
signal  indication  should  be  given  in  time  to  per- 
mit a  train  to  enter  without  unnecessary  delay. 

331.  If,    from    the    failure    of    block    signal 
apparatus,  the  block  signal  cannot  be  changed 
from  the  normal  indication,  a  signalman  having 
information   from   the   signalman   at   the   next 
block  station  in  advance  that  the  block  is  clear, 
may  admit  a  train  to  the  block  by  the  use  of 
Clearance  Card  (Form  A). 

Ill 


If  the  block  is  occupied  by  a  train,  other  than 
an  opposing  train  or  a  passenger  train,  the 
signalman  may  admit  a  following  train  by  the 
use  of  Permissive  Card  (Form  C). 

332.  If,  from  any  cause,  a  signalman  is  unable 
to  communicate  with  the  next  block  station  in 
advance,  he  must  stop  all  trains  approaching  in 
that  direction.     Should  no  cause  for  detaining 
a  train  be  known,  it  may  then  be  permitted  to 
proceed  with  Caution  Card  (Form  B),  provided 
ten    minutes    have   elapsed    since    the    passage 
of  the  last  preceding  train. 

332a.  Caution  Card  (Form  B)  must  not  be 
issued  when  communication  can  be  had  with  the 
train  dispatcher. 

333.  Signalmen    must    have    the    proper    ap- 
pliances for  hand  signaling  ready  for  immediate 
use.     Hand  signals  must  not  be  used  when  the 
proper  indication  can  be  displayed  by  the  block 
signals,  except  as  prescribed  by  Rule  329  or  343. 
When  hand  signals  are  necessary  they  must  be 
given  from  such  a  place  and  in  such  a  way  that 
there  can  be  no  misunderstanding  on  the  part  of 
enginemen  or  trainmen  as  to  the  signals,  or  as  to 
the  train  or  engine  for  which  they  are  given.* 

334.  Block  signals  for  a  track  apply  only  to 
trains  moving  with  the  current  of  traffic  on  that 
track.     Signal   men   will   use   Permissive   Card 
(Form  C-2)  and  Clearance  Card  (Form  A)  and 


*NOTE  TO  RULE  333.— Hand  signaling  includes  the  use  of  lamp, 
flag,  torpedo  and  fusee  signals. 

112 


in  addition,  if  block  is  occupied,  Permissive  Card 
(Form  C)  for  blocking  trains  moving  against  the 
current  of  traffic. 

335.  Signalmen  will  be  held  responsible  for  the 
care  of  the  block  station,  lamps  and  supplies; 
and,    unless    otherwise   provided,   of    the  signal 
apparatus. 

336.  Lights  in  block  stations  must  be  so  placed 
that  they  cannot  be  seen  from  approaching  trains, 

337.  Lights  must  be  used  upon  all  block  signals 
from  sunset  to  sunrise  and  whenever  the  signal 
indications  cannot  be  clearly  seen  without  them. 

338.  If  a  train  overruns  a  Stop-signal,  the  fact 
must  be  reported  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

339.  If  a  Stop-signal  is  disregarded,  the  fact 
must  be  reported  to  the  next  block  station  in  ad- 
vance and  then  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

340.  To  open  a  block  station  the  signalman 
must  give  8  to  the  next  block  station  in  each 
direction  and  record  the  trains  that  are  in  the 
extended    block.     He    must    then    display    the 
normal   signal   indication  and   notify  the  next 
tyock  station  in  each  direction  that  the  block 
station  is  open. 

When  trains,  which  were  in  the  extended  block 
when  the  block  station  was  opened  and  which  had 
passed  his  block  station  before  it  was  opened, 
clear  the  block  in  advance  he  must  repeat  the 
record  to  the  block  station  in  the  rear. 

340a.  Block  circuits,  under  normal  conditions, 
must  not  be  extended  through  block  offices  when 
signalmen  are  on  duty. 

113 


341.  A  block  station  must  not  be  closed  except 
upon  authority  of  the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

341a.  When  one  signalman  relieves  another, 
the  one  going  off  duty  will  make  transfer  on 
prescribed  form,  signing  it.  The  transfer  must 
also  be  signed  by  the  one  coming  on  duty. 

342.  Unless  otherwise  provided,  a  block  station 
must  not  be  closed  until  the  block  in  each  direc- 
tion is  clear  of  all  trains. 

To  close  a  block  station,  the  signalman  must 
give  9  to  the  next  block  station  in  each  direction, 
and  when  he  receives  13  enter  it  on  his  block 
record,  with  the  time  it  is  received  from  each 
block  station. 

The  block  signals  must  then  be  cleared,  all  lights 
extinguished  and  the  block  wires  arranged  to 
work  through  the  closed  block  station. 

343.  When   a   block   station   is   open   at   an 
irregular  hour,  signalmen  must  use  hand  signals, 
in  addition  to  block  signals,  to  give  the  required 
indications  until  all  trains  have  passed  which 
have  not  been  notified  by  train  order  or  by  special 
instructions    that    the    block    station    is    ope». 
Signalmen  must  take  special  precautions  to  call 
the  attention  of  trains  approaching  the  block 
station  to  the  indications  of  the  block  signals. 

343a.  When  a  block  station  is  closed  at  an 
irregular  hour,  all  trains  that  may  be  affected 
must  be  notified. 

344.  Signalmen  must  not  permit  unauthorized 
persons  to  enter  the  block  station. 

114 


ENGINEMEN   AND  TRAINMEN.. 

361.  Block  signals  for  a  track  apply  only  to 
trains  moving  with  the  current  of  traffic  on  that 
track.  Permissive  Card  (Form  C-2)  and  Clear- 
ance Card  (Form  A)  and  in  addition,  if  block  is 
occupied,  Permissive  Card  (Form  C)  will  be  used 
for  blocking  trains  moving  against  the  current  of 
traffic. 

36  la.  Except  as  per  rules  85  and  D-85,  inferior 
trains  must  clear  a  block  before  a  superior  train  is 
due  to  enter  it. 

36 1&.  A  train  entering  a  block  by  authority  of 
clear  signal  and  failing  to  clear  it,  as  intended 
for  a  superior  train,  must  take  intermediate 
siding  or  protect  as  prescribed  by  Rule  99. 

^362.  Trains  must  not  pass  a  Stop-signal  with- 
out receiving  Clearance  Card  (Form  A),  Caution 
Card  (Form  B),  Permissive  Card  (Form  C),  or  a 
train  order  authorizing  them  to  do  so. 

362a.  A  train  may  pass  a  stop  signal  to  make 
a  station  stop,  to  take  coal  or  water,  or  to  enter 
a  siding  beyond  the  signal,  provided  the  track  is 
known  to  be  clear. 

3626.  Trains  moving  under  Permissive  Card 
(Form  C)  may  follow  the  next  preceding  train  as 
provided  in  Rule  91a  and  time-table  instructions. 

362c.  Trains  meeting  at  an  intermediate  siding 
must  each  receive  a  Permissive  Card  (Form  C-l); 
this  will  not  permit  the  inferior  train  passing 
the  station  indicated  until  the  superior  train  has 
been  met.  Should  the  inferior  train  fail  to  reach 
115 


a  siding,  it  must  protect  as  prescribed  by  Rule  99. 
The  superior  train  may  proceed  with  caution 
from  the  station  indicated  until  the  expected 
train  is  met. 

362d.  A  train  passed  at  an  intermediate  siding 
by  a  passenger  train,  must  not  follow-  within 
fifteen  minutes. 

3626.  Proper  authority  to  occupy  a  block  must 
be  obtained  from  signalman  before  proceeding. 

(1)  By  trains  arriving  at  a  block  station  where 
signal  indicates  stop: 

(2)  By  trains  occupying  sidings. 

(3)  To  re-enter  a  block. 

(4)  To  do  switching  or  cross  over. 

(5)  To  move  against  the  current  of  traffic. 

(6)  By  trains  starting  from  their  terminals. 

363.  Trains  must  not  proceed  on  hand  signals 
as  against  block  signals. 

364.  Unless  otherwise  directed,  when  two  or 
more  trains  have  been  coupled  and  so  move  past 
any  block  station,  they  must  be  separated  only 
at  a  block  station  and  the  signalman  notified. 

365.  When  a  train  takes  a  siding  it  must  not 
again  enter  the  block  without  the  permission  of 
the  signalman. 

A  train  having  passed  beyond  the  limits  of  a 
block  must  not  back  into  that  block  without  per- 
mission from  the  signalman. 

366.  Unless   otherwise   provided,    when   it   is 
necessary  for  a  train  to  cross  over,  the  signalman 
must  be  notified  and  permission  obtained  before 
crossing  over  or  returning. 

116 


A  Permissive  Card  (Form  C-2)  must  be 
obtained  to  occupy  opposite  track,  do  switching 
or  re-enter  a  block  and  must  be  returned  when 
the  movements  are  completed ;  this  will  not  relieve 
trainmen  from  compliance  with  Rule  99. 

3666.  A  Permissive  Card  (Form  C-2)  must  be 
obtained  at  each  station  when  moving  against 
the  current  of  traffic. 

367.  The   engineman   of   a   train   which   has 
parted  must  sound  the  whistle  signal  for  Train- 
parted  when  approaching  a  block  station. 

368.  An  engineman  receiving  a  Train-parted 
signal  from  a  signalman  must  answer  by  the 
whistle  signal  for  Train-parted. 

369.  When  a  parted  train  is  recoupled  the 
signalman  must  be  notified. 

370.  If  there  is  an  obstruction  between  block 
stations  notice   must   be  given  to   the  nearest 
signalman. 

371.  If  a  train  is  stopped  by  a  block  signal  the 
conductor    and    engineman    must    immediately 
ascertain  the  cause. 

37 la.  Trainmen  must  watch  the  block  signal 
and  be  governed  by  its  indication  until  the  entire 
train  has  passed. 

372.  Conductors  must  report  to  the  chief  train 
dispatcher    any    unusual    detention    at    block 
stations. 

372a.  At  a  block  station  where  there  is  no 
siding,  if  the  signal  is  at  stop,  and  if  the  signalman 
is  absent  or  incapacitated,  trains  must  wait  ten 
117 


minutes  and  then  proceed  with  caution  to  the 
next  block  station,  where  the  conductor  must 
report  the  fact  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

373.  A  block  station  must  not  be  considered  as 
closed,  except  as  provided  for  by  time-table  or 
special  instructions. 

374.  Time-tables  or  special  instructions  indi- 
cate block  stations. 


TIME  SPACING. 


380.  In   districts  in  which  the  movement  of 
trains  is  not  controlled  by  the  manual  or  auto- 
matic block  system,  trains  will  be  spaced  under 
special  instructions  contained  in  the  time-table 
of  each  division,  by  train  order  signal. 

381.  When  a  train  has  passed  train  order  signal 
and  the  signalman  has  seen  the  markers  he  must 
display  the  Stop  signal  and  keep  it  in  that  posi- 
tion after  the  train  has  departed,  as  per  Rule  9 la. 

382.  When  a  train  is  passed  by  another  at  a 
station  or  intermediate  siding,  the  following  train 
may  proceed,  as  per  Rule  9 la. 

383.  Operators    will    record   in   a   book   the 
arrival  and  departure  of  each  train. 


118 


AUTOMATIC  BLOCK  SYSTEM. 

REQUISITES   OF  INSTALLATION. 

1.  Signals  of  prescribed  form,  the  indications 
given  by  not  more  than  three  positions;  by  lights 
of  prescribed  color;  or  by  both. 

2.  The  apparatus  so  constructed  that  the  failure 
of  any  part  controlling  the  operation  of  a  signal 
will  cause  it  to  display  its  most  restrictive  indica- 
tion. 

3.  Signals  located  preferably  over  or  upon  the 
right  of  and  adjoining  the  track  to  which  they 
refer. 

3a.  On  double  track  signals,  if  practicable,  will 
be  located  over  or  upon  the  left  of  and  adjoining 
the  track  to  which  they  refer. 

4.  Semaphore  arms  that  govern,  displayed  to 
the  right  of  the  signal  mast  as  seen  from  an  ap- 
proaching train. 

4a.  When  one  arm  is  used  on  an  upper  quad- 
rant semaphore  signal  a  marker  will  be  used 
placed  below  the  arm  and  extending  to  the  right 
of  the  signal  mast  on  a  Stop  signal  and  to  the  left 
on  a  Stop  and  Proceed  signal.  At  night  the 
marker  will  show  a  white  light  vertically  below 
the  upper  light  on  a  Stop  signal  and  diagonally 
below  on  a  Stop  and  Proceed  signal. 

When  two  arms  are  used  on  an  upper  quad- 
rant semaphore  signal  the  lower  semaphore  cast- 
ing will  appear  to  the  right  of  the  signal  mast 
on  a  Stop  signal  and  to  the  left  of  the  signal 
mast  on  a  Stop  and  Proceed  signal.  At  night 
the  lower  light  will  show  vertically  below  the 

119 


upper  light   on    a  Stop   signal   and   diagonally 
below  on  a  Stop  and  Proceed  signal. 

4&.  Where  the  disc  is  used,  the  indications  will  be 
given  by  two  positions  of  a  red  or  green  disc,  and, 
in  addition,  at  night,  by  lights  of  prescribed  color. 
The  face  of  a  home  signal  case  is  painted  black, 
and  the  back  yellow.  The  face  of  a  distant  signal 
<case  is  painted  white  and  the  back  yellow. 

6.  Continuous  track  circuits. 

7.  Signal  connections  and  operating  mechan- 
ism so  arranged  that  a  Home  Block  Signal  will 
display  the  indications  provided  in  Rules  501  A, 
501  AA  or  501  G  after  the  front  of  a  train  shall 
have  passed  it. 

8.  Switches  in  the  main  track  so  connected 
with  the  block  signals  that  the   Home   Block 
Signal  in  the  direction  of  approaching  trains  will 
display  the  indications  provided  in  Rules  501  A, 
501  AA  or  501  G  when  the  switch  is  not  set  for -the 
main  track. 

8a.  Cross-over  switches  between  the  main 
tracks  so  connected  with  the  block  signals,  that 
the  Home  Block  Signals  in  the  direction  of  ap- 
proaching trains  will  display  the  indications 
provided  in  Rules  501  A  or  501  AA  when  either 
switch  of  the  cross-over  is  not  set  for  the  main 
track. 

RULES. 

The    aspects    shown    in   the   following   rules 
are  those  mostly  used.     Other  combinations  of 
semaphores  or  combinations  of  semaphores  and 
disc  signals  may  be  used. 
120 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  —  STOP. 

NAME —  STOP-SIGNAL. 

501  A. 


121 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  —  STOP;    THEN  PROCEED. 

NAME  —  STOP  AND    PROCEED-SIGNAL. 

501  AA. 


122 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  —  APPROACH  NEXT  SIGNAL  PREPARED 

TO  STOP. 

NAME  — -  APPROACH-SIGNAL. 
501  B. 


123 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  — APPROACH  NEXT  SIGNAL 

PREPARED  TO  STOP. 

NAME  — APPROACH  SIGNAL 

501  B. 


124 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


o)     (9 


INDICATION  —  PROCEED. 

NAME  —  CLEAR-SIGNAL. 

501  C. 


125 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


V 
I 


INDICATION  —  APPROACH  NEXT  SIGNAL  AT 

RESTRICTED  SPEED. 

NAME  —  APPROACH-RESTRICTING-SIGNAL. 
501  E. 


126 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  —  PROCEED  AT  RESTRICTED  SPEED. 
NAME  —  CLEAR-RESTRICTING-SIGNAL. 

501  F. 


127 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION— PROCEED  AT    SLOW    SPEED    PREPARED 

TO  STOP  SHORT  OF  TRAIN  OR  OBSTRUCTION. 

NAME  —  PERMISSIVE-SIGNAL. 

501  G. 


128 


THREE-POSITION  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  — PROCEED   AT    SLOW    SPEED    PREPARED 

TO  STOP  SHORT  OF  TRAIN  OR  OBSTRUCTION. 

NAME  —  PERMISSIVE-SIGNAL. 

501  G. 


129 


TWO-POSITION  HOME  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 


1 


INDICATION — STOP;    THEN  PROCEED. 
NAME  —  STOP  AND   PROCEED-SIGNAL. 

502  AA. 


130 


TWO-POSITION  HOME  BLOCK  SIGNALS, 


INDICATION  —  PROCEED. 

NAME —  CLEAR-SIGNAL. 

502  C. 


131 


TWO-POSITION  DISTANT  BLOCK  SIGNALS, 
"58s 


INDICATION  —  APPROACH  HOME  SIGNAL,  WITH 

CAUTION. 

NAME  —  CAUTION-SIGNAL. 
503  J. 


132 


TWO-POSITION  DISTANT  BLOCK  SIGNALS. 

Automatic 


INDICATION  —  PROCEED. 
NAME  —  CLEAR-SIGNAL,. 

503  K. 


133 


TWO-POSITION  HOME  AND  DISTANT  BLOCK 
SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  —  STOP;    THEN  PROCEED. 

NAME  — STOP  AND  PROCEED-SIGNAL. 

504  AA. 


134 


TWO-POSITION  HOME  AND  DISTANT  BLOCK 
SIGNALS. 


INDICATION— APPROACH  NEXT  SIGNAL  PREPARED 

TO  STOP. 

NAME  —  APPROACH-SIGNAL.. 
504  B. 


135 


TWO-POSITION  HOME  AND  DISTANT  BLOCK 
SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  —PROCEED. 

NAME  —  CLEAR-SIGNAL. 

504  C. 


136 


505.  Block  signals  govern  the  use  of  the  blocks, 
but,  unless  otherwise  provided,  do  not  super- 
sede the  superiority  of  trains;  nor  dispense  with 
the  use  or  the  observance  of  other  signals  when- 
ever and  wherever  they  may  be  required. 

506.  Lights  must  be  used  upon  all  block  signals 
from  sunset  to  sunrise  and  whenever  the  signal 
indications  cannot  be  clearly  seen  without  them. 

ENGINEMEN    AND    TRAINMEN. 

508.  Block  signals  for  a  track  apply  only  to 
trains  moving  with  the  current  of  traffic  on  that 
track. 

509.  When   a   train   is   stopped   by   a   Stop- 
signal  it  must  stay  until  authorized  to  proceed, 
or  in  case  of  failure  of  means  of  communication 
it  may  proceed  when  preceded  by  a  flagman  to 
the  next  signal  displaying  a  proceed  indication. 

When  a  train  is  stopped  by  a  Stop  and  Proceed- 
signal  it  may  proceed: 

(A.)  On  single  track  when  the  signal  is  cleared, 
or  if  not  immediately  cleared  and  except  when 
train  is  proceeding  under  flag  from  last  Stop- 
signal,  it  may  proceed  at  once  at  slow  speed  ex- 
pecting to  find  train  in  block,  broken  rail,  obstruc- 
tion or  switch  not  properly  set. 

(B.)  On  two  or  more  tracks  at  once  at  slow 
speed,  expecting  to  find  a  train  in  the  block, 
broken  rail,  obstruction  or  switch  not  properly 
set. 

137 


509c.  When  a  train  is  stopped  by  a  Stop  signal 
on  single  track  and  authority  to  proceed  is  re- 
quested, before  it  is  given  by  the  Train  Dis- 
patcher, he  will  ascertain  if  there  is  any  opposing 
train  or  yard  engine  movement  which  will  affect 
that  Stop  signal.  When  assured  that  there  is  no 
such  movement,  authority  will  be  issued  to  the 
train  in  the  following  form: 

"  You  may  proceed  at  slow  speed  expecting  to 
find  a  broken  rail,  obstruction  or  switch  not  prop- 
erly set." 

Should  the  Train  Dispatcher  not  be  able  to 
assure  himself  that  there  is  no  opposing  train 
or  yard  engine  movement,  authority  to  the 
train  will  be  issued  as  follows: 

"  You  may  proceed  under  protection  of  flag  to 
the  first  signal  that  indicates  proceed." 

These  instructions  must  be  repeated  by  the 
conductor  or  engineman  to  insure  correct  under- 
standing, and  entry  made  in  the  Train  Order 
Book. 

510.  When  a  train  is  stopped  by  a  block  signal 
which  is  evidently  out  of  order,  and  not  so  in- 
dicated, the  fact  must  be  reported  to  the  Chief 
Train  Dispatcher. 

510a.  In  reporting  a  signal  out  of  order  it 
will  be  done  by  its  number. 

5106.  When  a  rail  is  broken  in  track  which  is 
bonded  for  track  circuit  the  signal  maintainer 
must  be  notified  immediately  so  that  he  can 
restore  normal  conditions  as  soon  as  track  is 
repaired. 

138 


511.  Both  switches  of  a  cross-over  must  be 
open  before  a  train  starts  to  make  a  cross-over 
movement,   and  the  movement  must  be  com- 
pleted before  either  switch  is  restored  to  normal 
position. 

512.  Where   switch   indicators  are   used,   the 
indications  displayed  do  not  relieve  enginemen 
and   trainmen   from   protecting   their   train   as- 
required  by  the  rules. 

512a.  A  switch  must  not  be  opened  to  permit 
a  train  movement  to  a  main  track  when  the 
semaphore  arm  is  horizontal  or  the  disc  is  visible 
in  the  indicator  box  at  the  switch,  except  under 
protection  as  per  Rule  99. 


INTERLOCKING. 


DEFINITIONS. 

INTERLOCKING. — An  arrangement  of  switch,, 
lock  and  signal  appliances  so  interconnected  that 
their  movements  must  succeed  each  other  in  a 
pre-determined  order. 

INTERLOCKING  PLANT. — An  assemblage  of 
switch,  lock  and  signal  appliances,  interlocked. 

INTERLOCKING  STATION. — A  place  from  which 
an  interlocking  plant  is  operated. 

FIXED  SIGNAL. — A  signal  of  fixed  location  in- 
dicating a  condition  affecting  the  movement  of  a 
train. 

INTERLOCKING  SIGNALS. — The  fixed  signals  of 
an  interlocking  plant. 

139 


HOME  SIGNAL. — A  fixed  signal  at  the  entrance 
of  a  route  or  block  to  govern  trains  in  entering 
.and  using  said  route  or  block. 

DISTANT  SIGNAL. — A  fixed  signal  used  in  con- 
nection with  one  or  more  home  signals  to  govern 
the  approach  thereto. 

DWARF  SIGNAL. — A  low  home  signal. 

REQUISITES  OF  INSTALLATION. 

1.  Signals  of  prescribed  form,  the  indications 
given  by  not  more  than  three  positions;  by  lights 
of  prescribed  color;  or  by  both. 

2.  The    apparatus    so    constructed    that    the 
failure  of  any  part  controlling  the  operation  of  a 
.signal  will  cause  it  to  display  its  most  restrictive 
indication. 

3.  Signals  located  preferably  over  or  upon  the 
right  of  and  adjoining  the  track  to  which  they 
refer. 

3a.  On  double  track  the  high  signals,  if  practi- 
cable, will  be  located  over  or  upon  the  left  of  and 
adjoining  the  track  to  which  they  refer. 

4.  Semaphore  arms  that  govern,  displayed  to 
the  right  of  the  signal  mast  as  seen  from  an  ap- 
proaching train. 

4a.  When  one  arm  is  used  on  an  upper  quad- 
rant semaphore  signal,  a  marker  will  be  used 
placed  below  the  arm  and  extending  to  the  right 
of  the  signal  mast.  At  night  the  marker  will 
show  a  white  light  vertically  below  the  upper 
light  on  a  Stop  signal  and  a  red  and  green  light 
vertically  below  on  a  Distant  signal. 
140 


When  two  arms  are  used  on  an  upper  quadrant 
semaphore  signal  the  lower  semaphore  casting 
will  appear  to  the  right  of  the  signal  mast  on 
a  Stop  signal.  At  night  the  lower  light  will 
show  vertically  below  the  upper  light. 

5.  The  normal  indication  of  Home  Signals — 
Stop. 

9.     Latch  locking,  or  its  equivalent. 

10.  Interlocked  levers,  or  their  equivalent,  by 
which  switches,  locks  and  signals  are  operated. 

12.  The  interlocking  of  switches,  locks,  rail- 
road crossings,  drawbridges  and  signals  through 
levers,  or  their  equivalent. 

13.  Locks  for  all  switches. 

14.  Detector  bars,  or  their  equivalent,  for  all 
interlocked  switches. 

15.  Pipe,  or  its  equivalent,  compensated  for 
changes   in   temperature,    in   mechanical   inter- 
locking, for  connecting  levers,  with  switches  and 
locks. 

16.  The  interlocking  of  signals  with  switches,, 
locks,  railroad  crossings,  or  drawbridges,  so  that 
a  signal  permitting  a  train  to  proceed  cannot  be 
displayed  unless  the  route  to  be  used  is  set  and 
Stop-signals  displayed  for  all  conflicting  routes. 

17.  The  established  order  of  interlocking  such 
that: 

A  signal  permitting  a  train  to  proceed  cannot  be 
displayed  until  the  switches  in  the  route  to  be 
set  are  in  position  and  locked;  derails,  if  any,  in 
conflicting  routes  set  to  diverge  and  all  opposing 

141 


or  conflicting  signals  display  their  most  restrictive 
indication.  The  display  of  a  signal  to  proceed 
.shall  lock  the  arrangement. 

18.  Interlocking  and  Block  Signals,  inter- 
connected, where  both  are  operated  from  the 
same  station. 

RULES. 

The  aspects  shown  in  the  following  rules  are 
those  mostly  used.  Other  combinations  of 
semaphores  or  combinations  of  semaphores  and 
disc  signals  may  be  used. 

THREE-POSITION  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION— STOP. 

NAME— STOP-SIGNAL. 

601  A. 


142 


THREE-POSITION  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION— APPROACH  NEXT  SIGNAL  PREPARED 

TO  STOP. 

NAME — APPROACH-SIGNAL. 
601B. 


143 


THREE-POSITION  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION — APPROACH  NEXT  SIGNAL, 

PREPARED  TO  STOP. 
NAME— APPROACH-SIGNAL. 

601  B. 


144 


THREE  -  POSITION  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION— PROCEED. 

NAME— CLEAR-SIGNAL. 

601C, 


145 


THREE -POSITION  SIGNALS. 


A 


INDICATION— PROCEED  AT  RESTRICTED   SPEED 

PREPARED  TO  STOP  AT  NEXT  SIGNAL,, 

NAME— RESTRICTING-SIGNAL. 

601  D. 


146 


THREE-POSITION  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION — APPROACH  NEXT  SIGNAL,  AT  RE- 
STRICTED SPEED. 

NAME— APPROACH-RESTRICTING-SIGNAL,. 
601  E. 


147 


THREE-POSITION  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION — PROCEED  AT  RESTRICTED  SPEED 

NAME— CLEAR-RESTRICTING-SIGNAL. 

601  F. 


148 


THREE-POSITION  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  — PROCEED  AT  SLOW  SPEED 

PREPARED  TO  STOP. 

NAME  —SLOW-SPEED-SIGNAL.. 

601  G. 


149 


THREE.POSITION  SIGNALS, 


INDICATION  —  PROCEED  AT  SLOW  SPEED 

PREPARED  TO  STOP. 

NAME — SL.OW-SPEED-SIGNAL. 

601  G. 


150 


THREE-POSITION  SIGNALS. 


ILL 


INDICATION  — PROCEED  AT  SLOW  SPEED 

NAME  —OLE  AR-SLOW-SPEED-SIGNAL. 

601  H 


151 


TWO-POSITION  HOME  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  —  STOP. 

NAME  —  STOP-SIGNAL. 

602  A. 


152 


TWO-POSITION  HOME  SIGNALS. 


1 


INDICATION  —  PROCEED. 

NAME  —  CLEAR-SIGNAL. 

602  C. 


153 


TWO -POSITION   HOME  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION— PROCEED  AT  RESTRICTED  SPEED. 

NAME— CLEAR-RESTRICTING-SIGNAL. 

602  F. 


TWO -POSITION  DWARF  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION— PROCEED  AT  SLOW  SPEED 

PREPARED  TO  STOP. 
NAME— SLOW-SPEED-SIGNAL. 

602  G. 


154 


TWO-POSITION  DISTANT  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION— APPROACH  HOME  SIGNAL,  WITH 

CAUTION. 

NAME— CAUTION-SIGNAL. 
603  J. 


155 


TWO-POSITION  DISTANT  SIGNALS. 


INDICATION  — APPROACH  HOME  SIGNAL, 

WITH  CAUTION. 

NAME — CAUTION-SIGNAL. 

603  J. 


156 


TWO-POSITION  DISTANT  SIGNALS. 


oxg 


INDICATION — PROCEED. 

NAME — CLEAR-SIGNAL. 

603  K. 


157 


605.  Interlocking  signals  govern  the  use  of 
the  routes  of  an  interlocking  plant,  and  as  to 
movements  within  Home  signal  limits,  their  indi- 
cations supersede  the  superiority  of  trains,  but 
do  not  dispense  with  the  use  or  the  observance  of 
other  signals  whenever  and  wherever  they  may 
be  required. 

SIGNALMEN. 

611.  The  normal  indication  of  Home  Signals — 
Stop;  of  Distant  Signals — Caution. 

612.  Levers,   or  other  operating  appliances, 
must  be  used  only  by  those  charged  with  that 
duty  and  as  directed  by  the  rules. 

613.  When  the  route  is  set  the  signals  must 
be  operated  sufficiently  in  advance  of  approaching 
trains  to  avoid  delay. 

614.  Signals  must  be  restored  so  as  to  dis- 
play their  most  restrictive  indication  as  soon  as 
the  train  or  engine  for  which  they  were  cleared 
has  passed  within  the  home  signal  limits  of  the 
interlocking  plant. 

615.  If  necessary  to   change  any  route  for 
which    the    signals   have    been    cleared   for   an 
approaching  train  or  engine,  switches  must  not 
be  changed  or  signals  cleared  for  any  conflicting 
route  until  the  train  or  engine,  for  which  the 
signals  were  first  cleared,  has  stopped. 

616.  A  switch,  or  lock,  must  not  be  moved 
when  any  portion  of  a  train  or  an  engine  is  stand- 
ing on  or  closely  approaching  the  switch,  detector 
bar  or  circuit. 

158 


616a.  A  route  must  not  be  changed  when  a 
car  or  engine  is  standing  inside  of  the  home  or 
dwarf  signals  of  that  route. 

617.  Levers  must  be  operated  carefully  and 
with  a  uniform  movement.     If  any  irregularity, 
indicating  disarranged  connections,  is  detected  in 
their  working,  the  signals  must  be  restored  so  as 
to  display  their  most  restrictive  indication  and 
the  connections  examined. 

618.  During  cold  weather  the  levers  must  be 
moved  as  often  as  may  be  necessary  to  keep  con- 
nections from  freezing. 

619.  During  storms  or  while  snow  or  sand  is 
drifting  special  care  cnust  be  used  in  operating 
switches.     If  the  force  whose  duty  it  is  to  keep 
the  switches  clear  is  not  on  hand  promptly  when 
required,  the  fact  must  be  reported  to  the  chief 
train  dispatcher. 

620.  If  a  signal  fails  to  work  properly  its 
operation  must  be   discontinued  and  until   re- 
paired the  signal  secured  so  as  to  display  its 
most  restrictive  indication. 

621.  Signalmen  must  observe,  as  far  as  prac- 
ticable, whether  the  indications  of  the  signals 
correspond  with  the  positions  of  the  levers. 

622.  Signalmen  must  not  make  nor  permit  any 
unauthorized  repairs,  alterations  or  additions  to 
the  plant. 

Any  defects  in  the  interlocking  plant  must  be 
promptly  reported  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher 
and  the  interlocking  repairman  and  only  duly 
authorized  persons  permitted  to  make  repairs. 
159 


623.  If  there  is  a  derailment  or  if  a  switch  is 
run  through,  or  if  any  damage  occurs  to  the  track 
or  interlocking  plant,  the  signals  must  be  restored 
so  as  to  display  their  most  restrictive  indication, 
and  no  train  or  switching  movement  permitted 
until  all  parts  of  the  interlocking  plant  and  track 
liable  to  consequent  injury  have  been  examined 
and  are  known  to  be  in  a  safe  condition. 

624.  If  necessary  to  disconnect  a  switch,  de- 
rail, detector  bar  or  its  equivalent,  or  a  lock,  all 
switches  or  derails  affected  must  be  safely  secured. 

625.  When  switches  or  signals  are  undergoing 
repairs,  signals  must  not  be  displayed  for  any 
movements  which  may  be*  affected  by  such  re- 
pairs,  until  it  has  been  ascertained  from  the 
repairmen  that  the  switches  are  properly  set  for 
such  movements. 

625a.  When  any  part  of  an  interlocking  plant 
essential  to  the  safe  operation  of  a  train' at  normal 
speed  is  defective  or  out  of  order,  the  Stop  Signals 
must  be  held  at  the  Stop  position  until  the  train 
stops,  and  then,  if  movement  can  be  made  with 
safety,  a  signal  to  proceed  may  be  given.  This 
practice  must  continue  until  repairs  are  made 
and  the  plant  is  in  good  order. 

626.  Signalmen  must  observe  all  passing  trains  | 
and  note  whether  they  are  complete  and  in  order; 
should   there   be    any   indication   of   conditions 
endangering  the  train,  or  any  other  train,  the 
signalman  must  take  such  measures  for  the  pro- 
tection of  trains  as  may  be  practicable. 

160 


627.  If  a  signalman  has  information  that  an 
approaching  train  has  parted  he  must,  if  possible, 
stop  trains  or  engines  on  conflicting  routes,  clear 
the  route  for  the  parted  train,  and  give  the  Train- 
parted  signal  to  the  engineman. 

628.  Signalmen  must  have  the  proper  appli- 
ances for  hand  signaling  ready  for  immediate  use. 
Hand  signals  must  not  be  used  when  the  proper 
indication  can  be  displayed  by  the  interlocking 
signals.     When  hand  signals  are  necessary  they 
must  be  given  from  such  a  place  and  in  such  a 
way  that  there  can  be  no  misunderstanding  on 
the  part  of   enginemen  or  trainmen   as  to   the 
signals,  or  as  to  the  train  or  engine  for  which 
they  are  given. 

629.  If  necessary  to  discontinue  the  use  of  any 
interlocking  signal,  hand  signals  must  be  used  and 
the  chief  train  dispatcher  and  interlocking  re- 
pairman notified. 

629a.  When  necessary  to  use  hand  signals  to 
proceed,  the  route  must  be  known  to  be  properly 
set  up  and  the  train  come  to  a  stop  before  the 
signal  is  given. 

630.  Signalmen  will  be  held  responsible  for 
the  care  of  the  interlocking  station,  lamps  and 
supplies;  and,  unless  otherwise  provided,  of  the 
interlocking  plant. 

631.  Lights  in  interlocking  stations  must  be 
so  placed  that  they  cannot  be  seen  from  approach- 
ing trains. 

632.  Lights  must  be  used  upon  all  interlocking 
signals  from  sunset  to  sunrise  and  whenever  the 

161 


signal  indications  cannot  be  clearly  seen  without 
them. 

633.  If  a  train  or  engine  overruns  a  Stop-signal 
the  fact   must   be   reported  to  the   chief    train 
dispatcher,  also  on  the  daily  interlocking  report. 

634.  Signalmen  must  not  permit  unauthorized 
persons  to  enter  the  interlocking  station. 

ENGINEMEN  AND  TRAINMEN. 

661.  If  a  signal,  permitting  a  train  to  proceed, 
after  being  accepted,  is  changed  to  a  Stop-signal 
before  it  is  reached,  the  stop  must  be  made  at 
once.     Such  occurrence  must  be  reported  to  the 
chief  train  dispatcher. 

662.  Trains  or  engines  must  not  pass  a  signal 
indicating  stop,  except  as  provided  in  Rule  663. 

663.  Trains  or  engines  must  not  proceed  on 
hand  signals  as  against  interlocking  signals  until 
enginemen  and  trainmen  are  fully  informed  of  the 
situation  and  know  that  it  is  safe  to  proceed. 

663a.  Trainmen  must  not  give  a  proceed 
signal  against  interlocking  signals  that  are  in 
operation. 

6636.  Enginemen  and  trainmen  must  bring 
their  train  to  a  stop  at  a  fixed  signal  indicating 
Stop,  also  at  the  Stop  signal  of  an  interlocking 
plant  reported  out  of  service,  before  accepting 
a  hand  signal. 

663c.  When  a  train  is  stopped  by  a  signal 
without  apparent  cause,  trainman  or  engineman 
will  at  once  ascertain  the  cause  from  signalman. 
162 


664.  The  engineman  of  a  train  which  has 
parted  must  sound  the  whistle  signal  for  Train- 
parted  on  approaching  an  interlocking  plant. 

665.  An  engineman  receiving  a  Train-parted 
signal  from  a  signalman  must  answer  by  the 
whistle  signal  for  Train-parted. 

666.  When  a  parted  train  has  been  re-coupled 
the  signalman  must  be  notified. 

667.  Sand  must  not  be  used  over  movable 
parts  of  an  interlocking  plant. 

667a.  In  freezing  weather  overflow  from  in- 
jectors must  not  be  permitted  over  movable 
parts  of  an  interlocking  plant. 

668.  Conductors,     or     enginemen     of     yard 
engines,  must  report  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher 
any  unusual  detention  at  interlocking  plants. 

669.  Trains  or  engines  stopped  by  the  signal- 
man in  making  a  movement  through  an  inter- 
locking plant,  must  not  move  in  either  direction 
until  they  have  received  the  proper  signal  from 
him. 

^070.  A  reverse  movement  within  the  limits  of 
an  interlocking  pknt,  or  a  forward  movement 
after  making  a  reverse  movement,  must  not  be 
made  without  the  proper  interlocking  signal  or 
permission  from  the  signalman. 

SIGNAL.    REPAIRMEN. 

681.  Repairmen  are  responsible  for  the  in- 
spection, adjustment  and  proper  maintenance  of 
all  the  interlocking  plants  assigned  to  their  care. 

163 


682.  When  the  condition  of  switches  or  track 
does  not  admit  of  the  proper  operation  or  main- 
tenance of  the  interlocking  plant,  the  fact  must 
be  reported  to  the  division  superintendent  and 
supervisor  of  signals  or  division  engineer. 

683.  When  any  part  of  an  interlocking  plant 
is  to  be  repaired  a  thorough  understanding  must 
first  be  had  with  the  signalman,  in  order  to, secure 
the  safe  movement  of  trains  and  engines  during 
repairs.     The  signalman  must  be  notified  when 
the  repairs  are  completed. 

684.  If   necessary    to    disconnect    a    switch, 
derail,  detector  bar  or  its  equivalent,  or  a  lock, 
all  switches  or  derails  affected  must  be  safely 
secured  before  any  train  or  engine  is  permitted  to 
pass  over  them. 

685.  Alterations  or  additions  to  an  interlock- 
ing plant  must  not  be  made  unless  authorized  by 
the  signal  engineer. 


RULES  FOR  EMPLOYES  IN  GENERAL. 

NOTICE. 

In  addition  to  the  rules  under  this  heading, 
all  employes  of  the  operating  department  must 
provide  themselves  with  the  rules,  regulations  and 
instructions  issued  by  other  departments  which 
affect  their  duties,  be  thoroughly  conversant  and 
comply  therewith. 

164 


RULES  FOR  EMPLOYES  IN  GENERAL. 

700.  All  employes  should  promote  safety 
trains  and  the  good  service  of  the  company  by  all 
means  in  their  power;  reporting  any  defects  in 
signals,  track,  bridges    or    equipment,    or    any 
improper  conduct  of  employes. 

In  double  track  districts,  train  employes  should 
observe  trains  on  the  opposite  track  and  note  hot 
journal  bearings,  loose  doors,  or  anything  pro- 
truding that  would  be  liable  to  strike  a  train  on 
opposite  track,  and  if  they  observe  anything  out 
of  order  they  should  notify  the  men  upon  the 
train  by  proper  signal,  and  the  chief  train  dis- 
patcher when  practicable;  they  should  always 
observe  track  men  and  other  employes,  as  they 
pass,  and  be  watchful  for  signals  from  them. 

701.  In  case  of  accident  to  train,  a  thorough  Roadway 

1      inspection. 

inspection  must  be  made  at  once  for  any  possible 
defect  in  track  or  damage  to  roadway.  No 
movement  must  be  permitted  until  conditions 
are  known  to  be  safe  for  passage  of  trains.  If  a 
conductor  or  engineman  discovers  anything  wrong 
with  the  track,  bridges,  or  culverts,  which  would 
be  likely  to  cause  an  accident  to  a  following  train, 
protection  must  be  given  by  a  flagman,  the  sec- 
tion men  called,  and  the  chief  train  dispatcher 
notified  by  wire. 

702.  Conductors  and  enginemen  must  report  J**™*^ 
switches  found  out  of  order  or  misplaced.  mispmced. 

703.  Turn-tables  must  be  kept  locked,  except  Turn 
while  being  used  or  in  immediate  charge  of  em- 
ployes.    When  found  unlocked,  or  table  or  lock 

165 


storms. 


out  of  order,  the  fact  must  be  reported  at  once 
to  the  chief  train  dispatcher  by  wire. 

Fire  near  704.  When  fires  occur  on  or  near  the  right  of 
stodk  way  that  are  likely  to  cause  damage  to  property, 
wiri^down.  when  fences  are  down  or  stock  is  discovered  on 
the  right  of  way,  when  the  line  wires  are  down  or 
otherwise  in  disorder,  conductors  and  enginemen 
under  whose  observation  such  incidents  may  come 
will  report  them  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher  from 
the  first  station  and  will  stop  and  notify  the  first 
section  man  seen.  In  dry  and  windy  weather 
engines  must  be  watched  carefully  to  prevent 
setting  fire. 

severe  705.     Station  agents,  operators  and  watchmen 

must  report  immediately  by  wire  to  the  chief 
train  dispatcher  severe  rainstorm,  high  wind  or 
sudden  rise  of  streams  in  their  vicinity,  and  must 
see  that  the  section  foreman  is  on  hand  with  his 
men  to  protect  the  track  from  damage.  They 
must  see  that  cars  have  not  been  moved  by  the 
wind  to  endanger  the  passage  of  trains,  and 
remain  on  duty  under  the  above  cir.cumstances 
until  excused.  If  the  train  dispatcher's  office 
cannot  be  reached  the  roadmaster  must  be  noti- 
fied, if  possible,  and  all  trains  in  the  vicinity  of 
the  storm  or  danger  notified. 

High  water.  706.  Train  dispatchers,  agents  and  operators, 
in  cases  of  severe  storm  or  high  water  likely  to 
endanger  the  track  or  safety  of  trains  will  notify 
such  trains  to  be  under  full  control  within  the 
limits  of  the  storm;  keep  the  roadmaster  and  fore- 
man of  bridges  and  buildings  advised  and  will 

166 


require  the  section  foreman  to  inspect  and  report 
the  condition  of  track  at  once. 

In  case  of  threatened  storm  the  train  dispatcher 
will  obtain  frequent  weather  reports. 

707.  Conductors,  train  baggagemen,    brake-  Exami- 
men,  enginemen,    firemen,  yardmen,    train  dis- 
patchers, operators,  interlocking  levermen,  signal 
foremen,  maintainers  and  repairmen,  section  fore- 
men and  bridge  foremen  must  pass  an  examina- 
tion on  the  book  of  operating  rules. 

708.  No  person  suspended  or  dismissed  from  Re-em- 

*^  t  ployment. 

one  department  or  division  of  the  service  shall  be 
employed  in  another  without  the  consent  of  the 
head  of  the  department  or  division  from  which  he 
was  dismissed. 

709.  No   employe  will   be   permitted   to   be  Absence 

*?   «  .  from  duty- 

absent  from  duty  or  to  change  places  with  another 

without  obtaining  permission  from  proper 
authority. 

710.  Necessary    keys   will    be    furnished   to  Keys, 
such  employes  as  require  them;  they  must  be 
receipted  for  on  the  proper  form. 

711.  When  an  employe   leaves  the   service,  Leave  the 

r      »  7  service. 

all  equipment  supplied  by  the  company  must  be 
returned. 

712.  Standing  upon  the  footboards  of  engines  f* 
in  motion  while  coupling  to  cars,  going  between of  e 
cars,  or  any  car  and  engine  while  in  motion,  or 
walking  directly  in  front  of  a  moving  car  or  engine 
for  any  purpose,  or  standing  between  the  rails 

167 


and  getting  on  an  approaching  car  or  engine,  or 
pushing  over  draw  bars  of  moving  cars  or  engines 
for  any  purpose  whatsoever,  is  prohibited. 
Dangerous        713.     Stepping  upon  the  front  of  approaching 

practices.  ...  ,,« 

engines,  jumping  on  or  on  cars  or  engines  moving 
rapidly  and  all  similar  practices  are  dangerous , 
unnecessary,  and  are  prohibited. 
Ride  on          714.     No  person  will  be  permitted  to  ride  upon 

P110*    of  .,  „  .    ,  . 

the  pilot  or  pilot  step  of  an  engine,  either  in 
the  discharge  of  duty  or  otherwise. 

Riding  cars      715.     Only  trainmen  or  switchmen  may  be 
Pitching,     permitted  to  ride  cars  or  in  any  way  assist  in 

switching  trains  on  the  road  or  at  terminals. 
Sed  bycu~       ^^*    Work  trains  must  not  be  run  with  engine 
laborers.      pushing  cars  occupied  by  laborers,  except  when 
absolutely  necessary,  and  must  then  move  with 
caution,   prepared    to    stop    short    of    any  ob- 
struction. 

supplies.          717.     Conductors  must  know  at  all  times,  that 
their  trains  are  provided  with  everything  neces- 
sary for  them  to  comply  with  the  rules  of  the 
company. 
Acquainted       718.     Conductors    and    enginemen   called  for 

with  read.  ...  ,.     .    . 

service  requiring  a  movement  over  any  division 
or  sub-division  of  road,  the  physical  character- 
istics of,  or  the  special  time  table  rules  governing 
which  they  are  not  fully  acquainted  with,  must 
notify  the  Chief  Train  Dispatcher  by  wire  and 
receive  instructions  before  accepting  the  run. 
Trains  719.  When  trains  of  foreign  roads  are  de- 

detoured.  ° 

toured  over  the   C.  &  N.  W.  railroad  a  pilot 

engineman,  also  pilot  conductor,  must  in  every 

instance  be  provided.    When  C.  &  N.  W.  trains 

168 


are  to  be  detoured  over  foreign  railroads,  an 
engineman  pilot  and  conductor  pilot  will  be 
requested  to  be  furnished. 

720.  A  train  must  not  be  unnecessarily  delay-  ™ 
ed  after  train  orders  permitting  it  to  proceed  have 
been  received.      The  train  dispatcher  should  be 
notified  of  anticipated  delays. 

721.  Conductors    and    brakemen    of    freight  -f^J^y  to 
trains  must  station  themselves  where  signals  or  gJISK 
conditions  that  may  affect  the   movement   of 

their  train  can  be  observed  and  will  exchange 
signals  passing  through  all  stations.  When 
approaching  points  where  train  is  required  to 
stop  and  on  long  descending  grades  where  re- 
tainers are  used,  brakemen  must  be  on  top  of 
train  in  position  to  observe  signals  and  assist 
in  stopping  train  should  emergency  require. 
Enginemen  and  firemen  must  keep  watch  for 
signals  from  trainmen  at  all  times  and  must 
obtain  a  signal  to  proceed,  to  be  given  by  con- 
ductor or  trainman  at  the  rear  of  the  train  after 
all  switches  at  a  station  have  been  passed,  this 
signal  to  be  acknowledged  by  Whistle  Signal  14  (g). 
So  far  as  practicable,  when  approaching  high- 
way crossings  and  streets  at  grade,  around 
obscure  curves  and  through  all  stations,  both 
enginemen  and  firemen,  also  all  other  employes 
who  may  be  on  the  engine,  must  be  on  the  lookout 
to  prevent  injury  to  persons  or  damage  to  vehicles. 
Alarm  whistle  must  be  sounded  to  insure  atten- 
tion of  all  pedestrians  and  vehicle  occupants  ad- 
jacent to,  or  about  to  cross  the  tracks. 

169 


mennsfsTa-  ^^*  Brakcmen  and  yardmen  in  freight  transfer 
ob£??e to  service  in  terminal  districts  must  so  station 
themselves  as  to  be  in  position  to  observe  signals 
or  conditions  that  may  affect  the  movement  of 
their  train..  While  moving  through  yards,  rail- 
road crossings,  interlocking  plants,  draw  bridges 
and  points  where  there  is  frequent  train  move- 
ment, they  must  be  in  position  -to  assist  in 
stopping  or  protecting  train  should  emergency 
require.  Enginemen  and  firemen  must  keep 
watch  for  signals  at  all  times  and  co-operate  with 
trainmen. 

nagman          723.     Conductors  must  never  intrust  the  duties 

»5h  ianiies,  of  a  flagman  to  any   one   not   entirely  familiar 

with  the  rules,  except  in  emergency,  and  then 

give  the  fullest  instructions  that  circumstances 

will  permit. 

switching  724.  At  stations  such  switching  as  may  be 
required  by  the  agent  will  be  done.  Cars  will  be 
left  convenient  for  loading  and  unloading. 

cars  secure      See   that    cars    left    on   tracks    are    properly 

Sear  ^ain.  secured,  clear  of  the  main  track  and  so  they  will 

clear  a  man  riding  on  side  of  car  on  an  adjoining 

track.    If  a  car  is  set  out  without  a  brake,  the 

wheels  must  be  securely  blocked. 

cars  In  leaving  cars  they  will  be  left  as  far  from 

htehwafjom    public  crossings  as  conditions  will  permit  so  that 

crossing. 

persons  using  crossing  may  have  the  best  possible 
view  of  approaching  trains.  In  no  case  must 
cars  be  left  projecting  over  line  of  public  crossings. 


170 


When  necessary  to  cut  a  train  to  open  a  public 
crossing  cars  should  not  be  left  within  50  feet  of 
either  side  of  the  crossing  when  practicable. 

725.  Conductors  will  unload  way  freight   on  JJj^gJj1 
the  platform  of  the  freight  house,  or  at  such  other 
places  as  the  agent  may  designate. 

When  freight  is  discovered  damaged  or  pilfered,  Damaged 

i  .  an(?    Pilfe 

whether  unloaded  by  employes  or  others,  it  must freight- 
be  reported  to  the  Superintendent. 

Freight  must  not  be  unloaded  from  a  train  on 
which  passengers  are  carried,  while  it  is  in  motion. 

726.  No  part  of  a  train  shall  be  left  standing  g 

on  a  railroad  crossing  or  interlocking  plant  so  as  joking1.11" 
to  interfere  with  other  movements  if  it  can  be 
avoided. 

727.  Switches  must  be  set  for  the  dead  rails  switches 
over  track  scales  when  scales  are  not  in  use.  dead  rails- 
Engines  must  not  be  run  over  the  weighing  rails, 

and  cars  only  when  being  weighed. 

728.  Agents,  yardmen  and  trainmen  will  give  £asrpectlon. 
special  attention  to  facilitating  car  inspection, 

the  proper  placing  of  cars  needing  repairs,  and  the 
transferring  of  freight  liable  to  delay.  When 
necessary  to  disturb  cars  that  are  being  loaded 
or  unloaded,  ample  warning  must  be  given  and 
cars  must  not  be  moved  while  persons  are  in  or 
about  them.  Such  cars  when  moved  must  be 
replaced  in  the  same  position. 

729.  Cars  or  tanks  containing  oil  or  other  placing  cars 

in    trains. 

inflammable  substances  must  in  no  case  be  placed 

next  to  the  engine  or  the  caboose  when  there  are 

other  cars  in  the  train;  they  should  be  ten  cars 

171 


from  the  engine  or  caboose  when  it  can  be  done. 
Wooden  platform  or  flat  cars  empty  or  with  less 
than  15,000  pounds  of  load  must  be  placed  next  to 
the  caboose  when  practicable;  but  in  trains 
•carrying  passengers,  flat  cars  loaded  with  logs, 
piling,  poles  or  timber  must,  when  possible,  be 
placed  and  hauled  in  trains  at  least  five  cars 
ahead  of  the  caboose.  Cars  loaded  with  live 
poultry  or  stock  will  be  placed  as  near  the 
caboose  as  the  make-up  of  the  train  will  permit. 
A  careful  examination  must  be  made  of  doors, 
locks  and  fastenings,  and  cars  must  not  be 
moved  until  properly  secured.  Every  facility 
must  be  rendered  parties  in  charge  for  proper- 
examination  and  care  of  their  stock,  notifying 
attendants  when  train  is  expected  to  stop,  and  a 
sufficient  length  of  time  allowed  to  afford  them  an 
opportunity  to  examine  it.  When  stock  gets 
down,  the  car  will  be  left,  at  request  of  attendant, 
at  any  station.  Place  cars  at  chute  convenient 
for  party  in  charge  to  unload,  and  during  hot 
weather  shower  such  stock  as  may  require  it, 
except  when  requested  not  to  do  so  by  the  party 
in  charge. 

car  doors  ?30.  The  doors  of  freight  cars  must  be  kept 
closed  when  not  in  use.  When  either  loaded  or 
empty  cars  are  placed  in  a  train  it  is  the  duty  of 
Conductors  and  Car  Inspectors  to  know  that  the 
doors  are  properly  closed  and  securely  fastened 
by  the  regular  fixtures. 

When  box  cars   containing  perishable  freight 
or  stock  necessary  to  have  ventilation  from  side 

172 


doors  are  placed  in  a  train,  these  doors  may  be 
left  partially  open,  but  securely  fastened  so  as  to 
prevent  their  being  moved  in  either  direction. 
Such  cars  must  be  frequently  inspected  enroute 
and  know  that  doors  are  secured. 

Doors  must  not  be  nailed  or  otherwise  irregu- 
larly attached  to  the  car,  except  in  cases  of  emer- 
gency; under  such  circumstances  they  must  be 
carefully  watched  to  prevent  them  from  becoming 
loosened  and  striking  passing  trains,  and  per- 
manent repairs  must  be  made  at  the  first  car 
repairing  station. 

731.  Great  c^re  should  be  taken  to  prevent 
injury  to  live  stock.     Trains  must  come  to  a 
stop,  if  necessary,  to  avoid  doing  so.     When  an 
accident  to  live  stock  occurs,  the  conductor  and 
engineman  must  report  to  the  superintendent,  as 
soon  thereafter  as  possible,  on  form  1207. 

732.  Passengers,  including  employes  not  on 
duty,  must  not  be  carried  on  freight  trains  without train 
proper   authority.     Persons  accompanying  live 
stock  or  perishable  freight,  for  the  purpose  of 
taking  care  of  it,  will,  on  presentation  of  proper 
transportation,  be  allowed  to  ride  on  the  same 
train  with  it,  but  in  the  caboose  only,  except 
when  with  race-horses,  they  may  be  allowed  to 
ride  in  same  car. 

733.  Freight  trains  scheduled  to  carry  passen- 
gers  will  be  particular  to  have  the  caboose  stop  at 
the  depot  platform  to  receive  and  discharge  them. 
Before  the  arrival  of  train  at  any  station  where 
they  stop,  the  conductor  will  distinctly  call  out 
the  name  of  station. 

173 


piling  734.     Station,  track  and  other  employes  must 

material.  \  *      * 

see  that  material  stored  along  the  track  and  at 
stations  is  neatly  piled,  and  the  right  of  way 
and  station  grounds  kept  in  tidy  condition. 
Material  must  not  be  piled  or  stored  within  six 
feet  of  nearest  rail,  either  main  or  side  track, 
or  any  building,  shed,  platform  or  other  structure 
erected  closer  than  six  feet  from  the  track 
without  authority  from  the  proper  officers. 

obstructions.  Employes  should  report  to  their  superiors,  all 
overhead,  side  or  under  foot  obstructions,  so  that 
same  can  be  removed. 

car  735.     Care  must  be  taken  to  economize  in  the 

use  of  cars,  small  lots  of  freight  being  loaded  into 
cars  in  passing  trains.  Exception  may  be  made 
in  case  of  perishable  freight  when  passing  trains 
have  no  room  for  it. 

inactions.  736.  Legal  proceedings  against  the  Company 
are  of  various  kinds,  such  as  actions  to  recover 
money  judgments,  actions  to  compel  the  Company 
or  its  agents  to  perform  some  legal  duty,  garnishee 
cases,  attachment  cases,  replevin  cases,  special 
assessments  for  street  paving,  sidewalk  construc- 
tion and  the  like,  and  ditch  and  drainage  cases. 

summons.  All  of  these  proceedings  are  commenced  by 
summons,  or  some  kind  of  notice,  and  these  sum- 
mons or  notices  are  either  served  upon  the  agents 
of  the  Company  by  an  officer  or  some  individual, 
or  they  are  served  by  publication  of  the  summons 
or  notice  in  local  newspapers. 


174 


It  is  important  that  the  Law  Department, 
which  is  responsible  for  the  conduct  of  legal  pro- 
ceedings, be  notified  of  the  commencement  of  any 
legal  proceeding  at  the  earliest  possible  moment, 
and  in  communicating  with  the  Law  Department 
you  will  please  address  the  General  Counsel,  at 
Chicago,  Illinois. 

Because  many  legal  proceedings  are  commenced 
by  publication  of  notice  in  local  newspapers, 
as  above  stated,  it  is  important  that  you  should 
look  over  the  publications  in  your  local  papers, 
and  if  you  observe  any  notice  in  which  this 
Company  is  named,  or  which  in  any  way  relates 
to  the  property  of  this  Company,  its  stations, 
station  grounds,  right  of  way,  or  the  like,  cut  it 
out  at  once,  and  send  it  immediately  to  the 
General  Counsel,  giving  name  and  date  of  news- 
paper. 

Whenever  any  summons  or  any  formal  notice 
or  document  is  served  upon  you,  notify  General 
Counsel,  General  Offices,  Chicago,  at  once,  by 
telegraph,  stating  the  nature  of  the  document,  if 
possible. 

Note  on  the  document  left  with  you,  whatever 
it  be,  the  date  and  hour  when  you  received  it, 

Transmit  all  such  documents  to  the  General 
Counsel  by  the  first  train.  If  you  know  any- 
thing about  any  facts  relating  to  the  matter, 
send  statement  with  papers. 

In  garnishee  cases  advise  the  General  Counsel 
by  wire  of  the  service  of  the  papers,  the  name 
and  occupation   of  the   employe,   and  whether 
married  or  single,  if  you  know. 
175 


Also  notify  at  once  by  wire  your  Division 
Superintendent,  the  paymaster,  and  the  employe 
garnisheed,  if  known  to  you. 

You  will  send  the  garnishee  papers  served  upon 
you  to  the  General  Counsel  by  first  train,  as 
above  requested.  Note  time  and  amount  of  fees 
received  by  you  from  officer. 

When  property  in  the  possession  of  the  Com- 
pany (that  is,  any  property  upon  Company  pre- 
mises, in  cars,  depots,  warehouses  or  station 
grounds,  and  the  like),  is  attached,  replevied  or 
levied  upon  (that  is,  when  any  officer  with  any 
writ  or  document  proposes  to  take  possession  of 
any  such  property),  notify  the  General  Counsel 
immediately  by  wire  of  the  fact  and  give  the 
name  and  address  of  the  consignor  and  consignee, 
place  of  shipment  and  destination  of  property, 
and  date  and  number  of  way-bill.  If  the  pro- 
perty attached,  replevied  or  levied  upon  is  bag- 
gage, notify  the  General  Counsel  of  number  and 
kind  of  check,  destination  of  baggage  and  name 
and  address  of  owner. 

In  all  cases,  when  a  copy  of  the  document  is 
not  given  to  you,  request  copy  of  the  officer. 

In  all  of  this  class  of  matters,  do  not  waive 
anything  or  consent  to  anything, 

If  an  officer  attempts  to  attach,  levy  upon  or 
take  away  any  property,  do  not  interfere  with 
him  or  attempt  to  prevent  him;  at  the  same 
time,  do  not  formally  consent. 

Under  no  circumstances  are  you  obliged  to 
unlock  any  door  at  the  request  of  any  officer, 

•      176 


unless  he  has  what  is  known  as  a  search  warrant, 
which  he  will  exhibit  to  you. 

Do  not  sign  any  admission  of  service  on  any 
summons,  document  or  other  paper. 

Please  remember  that  these  instructions  include  Notice 
all  notices  served  upon  you,  and  they  are  to  be 
sent  directly  to  the  General  Counsel  and  not 
through  any  other  official.  It  will  be  your  duty, 
also,  to  send  to  the  General  Counsel  all  notices 
which  may  affect  the  Company,  like  ordinances, 
special  assessments,  ditch  and  drainage  proceed- 
ings, etc.,  which  are  published  in  your  county 
papers.  If  you  are  subpoenaed  as  witness  in  a  subpoenae 
case  in  which  the  Company  may  be  interested, 
and  particularly  when  you  are  required  to  take 
any  Company  books  or  records  into  court,  notify 
the  General  Counsel  by  wire,  giving  all  the  infor- 
mation you  can.  This  does  not  apply,  of  course, 
when  you  are  called  by  the  Company.  In  any 
legal  matter  you  are  always  at  liberty  to  ask 
advice  from  the  General  Counsel,  and  in  cases  of 
doubt  it  is  your  duty. 

737.  Persons   whose   duties   do   not   require  permitted 

in    office. 

their  actual  presence  there  will  not  be  permitted 
to  enter  telegraph,  telephone  or  ticket  offices, 
interlocking  stations,  baggage  cars,  baggage  rooms 
or  similar  places. 

738.  The  use  of  the  telegraph  and  telephone  wire  serr 
must    be   restricted   to   company's   business   to 
which  an  immediate  answer  or  a  saving  of  time 

is  of  importance.     Messages  must  be  brief. 

177 


solicitors.  739.  Station  agents  or  conductors  will  not 
permit  hotel  representatives  or  other  unauthorized 
persons  to  solicit  business  or  distribute  advertis- 
ing matter  or  beggars  to  solicit  alms.  Gambling 
is  forbidden. 

irresponsible     740.     Persons  not  in  condition  to  care  for  them- 

persons. 

selves  must  not  be  admitted  to,  nor  carried  on 
trains  unless  accompanied  by  a  competent  person 
in  charge. 

consult e  741.  No  agent  or  employe  shall,  acting  for  the 
partment.  company,  procure  a  warrant  for  the  arrest  or 
cause  the  arrest  of  any  person  charged  with  an 
offense  without  first  consulting  either  the  law  or 
claim  department  and  obtaining  the  necessary 
authority. 

?na  aSty  742.  Reading  newspapers,  books  or  periodicals, 
or  the  playing  of  games  by  enginemen,  trainmen, 
signalmen,  watchmen  and  crossing  flagmen  while 
on  duty  is  forbidden. 

opening  743.     On  approaching  the  final  terminal  point 

floor   valves.  .  V^  •  t 

of  a  train,  the  front  trainman  ot  a  passenger  train 
will  pass  through  the  train  from  the  rear  end 
towards  the  forward  end,  opening  floor  valves, 
and  after  floor  valves  have  been  opened  he  will, 
on  trains  having  generator  in  forward  car,  notify 
the  electrician  in  charge  of  lighting  plant,  who 
will  shut  off  the  steam  from  the  train  line.  On 
trains  not  having  generator  in  forward  car  signal 
the  engineman  by  16  (1),  and  engineman  will 
answer  by  14  (g),  and  will  shut  off  steam  heat 
supply  from  the  engine. 

178 


744.     Cars  must  be  loaded  in  accordance  with  £a°rasdin* 
the  loading  rules  of  the  Master  Car  Builders'  Asso- 
ciation, which  are  revised  and  issued  frequently. 


INSTRUCTIONS  IN  CASE  OF  ACCIDENTS. 

800.  Whenever  passengers  or  employes  are  aS 
injured  see  that  everything  is  done  to  care  for 
them  properly,  no  matter  how  slight  the  wound 
or  eye  injury,  to  prevent  infection;  applying  the 
"first  aid"  package  treatment  when    available, 
calling  the  Company's  surgeon  to  treat  them,  or, 

if  prudent,  move  to  the  nearest  place  at  which 
the  company  has  a  surgeon,  and  leave  them  with 
such  surgeon  for  care  and  treatment. 

If  the  injury  be  serious  call  the  nearest  com- 
petent surgeon  obtainable  to  attend  until  the 
company's  surgeon  arrives. 

801.  Whenever  an  accident  happens  to  any  g-ured 
train  on  which    passengers    are    carried,    after 
everything  has  been  made  safe  the  conductor 
must  give  his  undivided  attention  to  the  care  and 
comfort  of  all,  especially  to  those  who  are  injured. 
Any   assistance,    article    or    facility     necessary 

for  this  purpose  may  be  obtained  where  available, 
a  record  being  kept  of  same.  A  sufficient  number 
of  competent  surgeons  in  the  vicinity  should  be 
called  to  care  for  the  injured.  The  company's 
surgeons  in  the  vicinity  should  be  notified  to 
come  immediately  to  the  place  of  accident.  The  . 
conductor  must  take  the  name  and  address  of. 

179 


every  person  on  the  train,  and,  if  possible  ascertain 
from  passengers  what  injury  if  any  they  received, 
noting  it  opposite  his  or  her  name,  on  form  1010. 

Trespassers  802.  When  persons  (other  than  employes)  by 
reason  of  climbing  on  or  jumping  from  moving 
trains,  or  walking  or  lying  on  the  track,  or  are 
otherwise  injured,  they  should  be  sent  to  their 
homes  or  placed  in  charge  of  the  local  city,  village 
or  township  authorities  and  no  expense  incurred 
on  the  part  of  the  company  in  the  matter. 

wire  report.  803.  A  report  of  all  accidents  must  be  sent 
immediately  to  the  superintendent  or  his  assistant 
by  the  conductor,,  engineman,  agent,  yardmaster, 
foreman  or  person  in  charge,  by  wire,  using  form 
1108,  giving  the  names  of  the  injured  persons  and 
witnesses,  the  extent  of  injuries  and  the  names  of 
the  owners  of  the  property  damaged  and  the 
extent  of  damage,  and  as  soon  as  possible  a  full 
and  detailed  report  made  on  form  148  and 
forwarded  to  the  superintendent  or  his  assistant, 
also  to  the  general  claim  agent,  a  separate 

Employes  report  being  made  for  each  person  injured.  If 
the  person  injured  is  an  employe  he  should  also 
make  and  sign  a  statement  of  facts  in  rela- 
tion to  the  accident  in  his  own  handwriting 
on  the  same  form;  should  he  be  unable  to  write, 
the  statement  should  be  written  at  his  dictation, 
and  after  being  read  over  to  him,  he  should  sign 
it  by  making  his  mark,  the  person  writing  and 
reading  statement  signing  same  as  a  witness. 

witnesses.  804.  Whenever  an  employe,  whether  on  duty 
or  not,  witnesses  an  accident  in  which  a  person  is 

180 


injured  or  property  damaged,  in  which  the  company 
is  in  any  way  concerned,  he  must  report  it  im- 
mediately on  form  148.  Every  effort  must  be 
made  to  procure  the  names  and  addresses  of  all 
persons,  particularly  outsiders,  who  witnessed  the 
accident,  especially  when  persons  are  injured 
within  the  corporate  limits  of  any  city,  town  or 
village,  or  when  crossing  the  tracks  at  a  public 
highway. 

805.  When  an  accident  occurs  on  an  engine,  Ensineman-s 

'  report. 

or  is  caused  by  an  engine  striking  any  person,  or 
conveyance,  or  when  cars  are  being  coupled  or 
uncoupled,  a  full  report  must  be  made  by  the 
engineman  on  form  148,  as  well  as  by  the  con- 
ductor or  the  person  in  charge  of  the  train. 

806.  When  persons  are  injured  while  coupling  coupling  or 

J  .  &  defective 

or  uncoupling  cars  or  in  getting  on  or  on  cars, 
whether  passenger  or  freight,  or  in  any  other  way 
in  which  the  accident  may  have  been  caused  by 
defective  appliances  or  machinery,  the  cars  or 
appliances  must  be  immediately  examined  by  the 
person  in  charge  or  by  the  agent,  to  ascertain  their 
condition,  and  report  made  of  the  inspection  on 
form  751,  giving  the  numbers  and  initials  of  cars 
examined  and  the  names  of  the  persons  making 
the  inspection.  The  superintendent  or  his  assist- 
ant will  then  notify  the  inspector  at  the  first 
division  terminal,  who  will  also  examine  the  ma- 
chinery, cars  or  appliances,  and  make  report  on 
same  form.  When  an  accident  is  caused  by 
defective  machinery  or  by  the  breaking  of 
machinery,  tools,  appliances  or  rails,  the  broken 

181 


or  defective  parts  must  be  so  marked  as  to  be 
readily  identified  and  immediately  turned  over 
to  the  superintendent  or  his  assistant  and  by  him 
forwarded  to  the  general  claim  agent. 

Accidents.  In  case  of  an  accident  resulting  from  failure, 
from  any  cause,  of  a  locomotive  boiler  or  any  of 
its  appurtenances  which  causes  injured  employe 
to  lose  more  than  three  days'  time,  general  claim 
agent  must  be  immediately  notified  by  wire. 

Death.  807.  When  an  accident  occurs  which  results 

in  the  death  of  any  person,  the  remains  of  the 
deceased  must  be  immediately  picked  up  and 
carefully  conveyed  to  the  nearest  station  building, 
care  being  taken  not  to  remove  the  body  outside 
the  limits  of  county  and  state  in  which  the 
'accident  happened.  The  agent  at  such  station 
will  then  notify  the  superintendent  by  wire,  as 
well  as  the  family  or  friends  of  the  deceased. 


OPERATORS. 


^SatoS!8  810.  Operators  will  be  appointed  by  the  chief 
train  dispatcher  in  his  capacity  as  chief  operator 
under  authority  of  the  superintendent  of 
telegraph. 

Seorattou>.  They  will  report  to  and  receive  their  orders 
from  the  chief  train  dispatcher,  and  will  comply 
with  the  instructions  of  the  superintendent  of 
telegraph;  also  of  the  head  of  the  office  in  which 
they  are  employed,  except  when  they  conflict 
with  other  instructions. 

182 


811.  They  are  required  to  be  constantly  on  when 

.  .     .  •          °n    duty- 

duty  during  the  hours  assigned,  unless  excused 

by  the  train  dispatcher.  Except  in  emergency 
cases,  they  will  not  be  allowed  to  remain  on  duty 
a  longer  time  than  that  prescribed  by  law.  Un- 
less relieved  by  another,  operators  will  be  excused 
by  the  train  dispatcher. 

When  relieving  each  other,  they  must  make  a  Transfer, 
transfer  on  a  blank  form  provided  for  the  purpose, 
of  all  orders  that  are  not  fully  executed,  and  must 
see  that  the  relieving  operator  fully  understands 
them. 

812.  Under    no     circumstances    should    an  orders  after 
operator  accept  a  train  order  for  a  train  of  which  to 

he  has  the  least  doubt  as  to  whether  it  has  passed 
his  station,  unless  instructed  to  do  so  by  the  train 
dispatcher,  who  has  knowledge  that  the  train  has 
not  passed. 

813.  In  offices  where  more  than  one  operator  But  one 
is  on  duty  at  the  same  time,  but  one  operator  will  £de*£.n 
be  permitted  to  handle  train  orders  and  clear 
trains. 

814.  In  closing  an  office,  cut  out  all  instru-  gu»^ng 
ments  at  the  switchboard,  exercising  care  not  to 
cross  the  wires.     The  address  of  an  operator  must 

be  kept  posted  in  the  bill  box  or  elsewhere  as 
directed,  showing  where  he  can  be  found. 

815.  Keep  a  register  of  the  arrival  and  de- 
parture  of  all  trains  and  report  same  to  the  train 
dispatcher;  report  the  weather  as  required,  and 
when  any  sudden  change  or  heavy  storm,  make  a 
special  report. 

183 


instruments  816.  ^SG  Srea^  care  m  adjusting  instruments 
at  all  times  especially  in  bad  weather;  never  open 
the  key  unless  positive  that  \*  ire  is  not  being  used. 
Contention  for  circuit  will  not  be  allowed. 

SXSS?1  817.  At  all  offices  where  arrangement  has  been 
made  for  the  handling  of  public  telegraph  busi- 
ness, operators  will  be  held  accountable  for  the 
prompt  and  proper  handling  and  reporting  of  such 
business  in  conformity  with  the  requirements  of 
the  telegraph  company,  and  which  they  must 
understand,  and  will  carry  out  the  instructions  of 
the  superintendent  of  telegraph  with  regard  to 
same. 

Condition         818.    See  that  the  offices  are  kept  in  a  neat  and 

stiSmeSk  orderly  condition;  instruments  clean  and  in  good 
working  order,  and  not  take  them  apart  or  alter 
the  arrangement  of  the  wires,  tables  and  appur- 
tenances, without  permission  of  the  superintend- 
ent of  telegraph,  and  notify  him  when  repairs  are 
needed. 

wSs?8  819.  If  the  line  fails,  each  operator  must  at 

once  test  the  wires  and  report,  if  possible,  on 
which  side  of  his  office  the  failure  is.  In  case  of 
any  trouble  on  them,  they  will  quickly  look  for  its 
whereabouts  and  be  sure  that  it  is  not  in  their 
offices.  The  use  of  ground  wires  is  strictly  prohib- 
ited, except  to  test  wires  or  in  case  of  emergency. 

Duties.  820.  They  must  invariably  sign  their  office 

call  when  using  the  line  for  any  purpose  whatever. 
It  is  the  duty  of  operators  to  promptly  discover 
and  remedy  inside  office  troubles  caused  by  open 
keys,  loose  connections,  etc.  They  must  know 

184 


that  the  ground  wires  are  in  good  condition, 
examine  switchboards,  keys,  instruments  and 
batteries  each  day,  and  know  that  all  binding 
screws  are  tight,  all  connections  good  and  prop- 
erly made,  and  that  paper  or  other  inflammable 
matter  is  kept  from  the  vicinity  of  wires  and 
switchboards.  They  must  familiarize  themselves 
with  switchboards  and  cutouts,  so  that  they  can 
properly  switch  wires  in  testing,  see  that  wires 
are  properly  labeled  on  the  switchboard  and  co- 
operate with  the  party  testing  wires,  assisting  in 
every  way  possible  to  clear  wire  trouble. 

821.  They  must  be  courteous  in  their  inter- courtesy, 
course  with  persons  transacting  business  at  their 
offices,  and  over  the  wires.     They  will  not  receive 
messages  to  be  transmitted  free  unless  signed  by 

an  officer,  agent  or  employe,  or  a  reply  to  same. 

822.  Preserve  messages  sent  and  promptly  Preserve 
deliver  those  received,  consider  all  messages  con- 
fidential, and  not  permit  them  to  be  read  by  any 
person  except  those  to  whom  they  are  addressed, 

nor  make  their  contents  the  subject  of  conversa- 
tion or  remarks. 

823.  All  messages  not  relating  to  the  business  paid  for. 
of  the  Company  must  be  paid  for,  unless  otherwise 
ordered  by  the  proper  authority. 

824.  Railroad   messages,   after   being   trans-  Filing 
mitted,  must  be  filed  daily,  and  preserved  until 
otherwise  ordered. 

A  separate  file  must  be  kept  of  copies  of  all  preserve 
train  orders  and  forms  used  for  train  movement  ™&n> 
and  preserved  until  otherwise  ordered. 

185 


Messages  received  for  delivery  to  a 
general  officer  enroute,  must  be  enclosed  in  an 
envelope,  sealed  and  addressed. 

l^d"™^*  826.  All  instruments  will  be  furnished  by  the 
company,  and  no  private  instrument  will  be 
allowed  on  the  wires.  No  private  lines  must  be 
connected  with  the  offices  or  buildings  without 
permission  of  the  superintendent  of  telegraph. 

use  of  827.     The  wires  are  not  to  be  used  for  the  trans- 

wires. 

mission  of  communications  which  may  be  sent 
by  train  without  detriment  to  the  company's 
interests,  and  operators  should  report  any  such 
cases  observed. 

standard         828.    Standard  time  will  be  sent  from  9:57 

time. 

a.  m.  until  10  a.  m.  daily,  and  has  absolute  right 
to  the  circuit. 

Breaking  in  upon  the  circuit  while  time  is  being 
sent  is  positively  prohibited,  and  operators  must 
be  sure  that  their  instruments  are  properly 
adjusted. 

? eiegraph         829.    Telegraph  students  will  not  be  permitted 

students.  .  . 

to  receive  or  forward  messages  except  in  the 
presence  of  the  regular  operator,  and  under  his 
direction.  The  attention  of  students  must  be 
.directed  to  the  rules  of  the  company,  and  par- 
ticularly those  relating  to  the  privacy  of  telegrams. 

promptness  830.  There  must  be  no  delay  in  obtaining 
answer  to  messages.  If  a  reply  cannot  be  had  in 
reasonable  time,  the  sending  office  must  be 
promptly  notified  the  reason. 

186 


TELEGRAPH  NUMERALS. 

1.     Wait  a  minute. 

4.  Where  shall  I  go  ahead? 

5.  Have  you  any  business  for  me? 

8.  You  are  breaking.     Close  your  key. 

9.  Conditions  requiring  immediate  action. 
18.     What  is  the  matter? 

19  or  31.     Signal  for  train  orders. 

23.     Messages  for  all  offices. 

25.     Busy  on  other  lines. 

86.     Division  Superintendent  or  Superintendent 

of  Telegraph. 
92.  Deliver  quickly. 
96.  President,  General  Manager  or  General 

Superintendent. 
134.     Who  is  at  the  key? 

The  usual  abbreviations  for  the  names  of  the 
months  and  stations. 
The  circuit  may  be  secured  by  any  of  the  Right  of 

.  .  signals    to 

following  signals,  which  take  precedence  in  the  circuit- 
order  named:— "96,"  "86,"  "9,'?  "Line,"  "19" 
and  "31." 


LINE  REPAIRERS. 

840.     Line  repairers  report  to  and  receive  in-  Report  to. 
structions  from  the  superintendent  of  telegraph 
but  will  comply  with  the  instructions  of  the  chief 
train  dispatcher. 

They  must  always  be  provided  with  a  full  set  of  Tools, 
tools  suitable  for  their  work  and  be  ready  to  re- 
spond immediately  to  any  orders  they  may  receive. 

187 


Report  each  morning  the  part  of  the  road  on 
which  they  expect  to  be  during  the  day. 

Exami-  They  will  go  over  their  respective  districts 

frequently,  examine  any  office  they  may  be  at,  and 
see  that  the  rules  are  being  complied  with. 

Applying  See  that  a  limited  supply  of  main  line  wire  is 
left  at  test  offices,  to  be  used  in  case  of  emergency, 
and  that  it  is  kept  in  a  designated  place  ready  for 
use.  They  must  see  that  section  foremen  also  are 
supplied  with  line  wire  and  will  instruct  them  as 
to  its  use.  Immediately  after  repairing  a  break 
in  the  wires  or  removing  any  trouble  therefrom, 
they  must  report  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher 
the  locality  and  cause  of  same,  and  render  to  the 
superintendent  of  telegraph  a  report  of  same. 

collect  See  that  all  unused  material  is  properly  stored, 

material.  .  •,•     "  -,       I 

and  use  strict  economy  in  its  disposition  and  at 
stated  tines  collect  all  the  old  copper  and  zinc, 
and  forward  the  same  as  directed. 


STATION  AGENTS. 


Duties.  850.    Station  agents  have  charge  of  the  busi- 

ness of  the  company  at  the  station,  and  all  prop- 
erty connected  therewith;  also  all  persons  em- 
ployed thereat,  and  must  see  that  each  perform 
their  duties  properly  and  promptly,  and  preserve 
order  about  the  station  and  grounds. 

Absence          851.    They    are   not    allowed    to    be  absent 
without  leave  from  the  superintendent,  except 

188 


through  illness,  in  which  case  they  must  immedi- 
ately inform  the  superintendent,  and  arrange  for 
some  competent  person  to  discharge  their  duties. 

852.  See  that  their  offices,   waiting  rooms,  condition  of 

station 

freight  houses,  other  station  buildings  and  plat-  property. 
forms  are  kept  in  a  clean  and  orderly  condition; 
that  all  grass,  straw,  or  other  combustible  material 
is  promptly  removed  from  depot  grounds  and 
premises;  that  stock  yards  are  kept  in  good  order 
and  ready  for  use,  that  street  crossings  or  side 
walks  are  not  obstructed,  also  station  platforms 
and  grounds  are  kept  clear  of  obstructions  over 
which  persons  may  stumble. 

853.  See  that  cars  left  at  their  station  have  the  Carg  at 
brakes    applied,    and    are   not   moved    by   un-Bt{ 
authorized  persons  or  shifted  so  as  to  interfere 
with  the  safety  of  trains,  and  that  all  switches  are 
properly  set  and  main  track  switches  locked. 

854.  Use  every  effort  to  secure  the  prompt  Dispatch 
dispatch  of  cars,  have  way-bills  ready  promptly,  ° 

so  that  trains  will  not  be  delayed.  See  that 
empty  as  well  as  loaded  cars  are  taken  by  trains  at 
the  earliest  possible  moment,  subject  to  the  order 
of  the  chief  train  dispatcher  and  car  service  agent. 

855.  Whenever  any  company  material  in  car-  company 

property. 

loads  is  received  at  any  station,  and  for  which 
there  is  no  disposition,  report  them  to  super- 
intendent at  once  by  wire,  giving  contents  and 
any  other  information  they  may  have,  so  that 
it  may  be  arranged  to  have  them  unloaded 
promptly. 

189 


Through  freight  must  not  be  loaded  into  a 
car  containing  freight  for  way  stations,  except 
where  it  is  absolutely  necessary. 

Loading  of       857.     In  loading  hay,  straw,  tow  and  similar 
tow.'  etc.   '  freight  that  is  liable  to  catch  fire,  be  particular 

to  select  tight  cars  and  that  all  openings  are 

closed  and  securely  fastened. 

See  that  all  nails,  cleats,  blocking,  wire,  etc., 
used  in  loading  cars  is  removed  when  car  is 
made  empty;  co-operation  of  shippers  and 
consignees  should  be  secured. 

piatfoms.  858.  Freight,  baggage,  trucks,  and  other 
articles  must  not  be  allowed  to  stand  on  the  depot 
platforms  where  they  might  cause  accident  or 
inconvenience  to  passengers  or  employes,  or 
receive  damage  from  the  weather.  U.  S.  mail 
pouches  must  not  be  left  unprotected  upon  the 
platforms  or  in  the  waiting  rooms  and  other 
exposed  places  at  stations. 

cars  on  859.  They  must  not  allow  a  car  to  stand  upon 
the  main  track  to  be  loaded  or  unloaded  without 
special  permission,  in  each  case. 

Keep  cross-  860.  See  that  freight  trains  do  not  block 
public  crossings  longer  than  allowed  by  law  or 
ordinance. 

Advertising  861.  Decline  to  allow  any  boards,  posters  or 
advertising  matter  to  be  placed  on  the  company's 
cars,  except  such  cards  as  are  furnished  by  the 
company. 

Advertising       862.     Do  not  permit  advertising  matter  to  be 

matter 

posted  in  or  about  stations,  or  other  structures 
190 


located    on    the    company's    property,    without 
proper  authority. 

863.  Keep  doors  of  freight  houses  closed  and  ofe 
securely  locked  at  all  times  when  proper  em- 
ployes are  absent,  and  not  permit  the  delivery  of 
freight  except  in  the  presence  of  themselves  or 
representative. 

864.  Tickets  must  not  be  sold  for  stations  at  Tickets. 
which  trains  do  not  stop,  or  for  trains  that  do 

not  carry  passengers. 

865.  Tickets  must  not  be  sold  to  persons  not  Tickets. 
in  condition  to  care  for  themselves,  unless  accom- 
panied by  a  proper  person,  nor  must  tickets  be 
sold   for    excursion    or    extra    trains    unless    so 
authorized. 

866.  Ticket   offices   must   be   open  at   least  T*keet    j 
thirty  minutes  before  the  arrival  of  trains  that 
stop,    and   kept    open   until    such    trains   have 
departed. 

867.  Station  agents,  acting  as  agent  for  any  J^ 
express  or  other  company,  must  give  preference 

to  the  duties  of  the  business  pertaining  to  the 
railway  company. 

868.  Promptly    advise    the    superintendent,  unusual 
either  by  wire  or  mail,  of  any  needed  repairs,  at e?< 
their   stations,   or   of  any  unusual   event  that 
occurs  in  their  neighborhood,  of  general  interest 

or  importance,  such  as  fires,  disasters,  deaths  of 
prominent  persons,  etc. 

869.  See  that  the  station  is  supplied  with  the  supply 

r  of    signals. 

necessary  lanterns,  flags,  fusees  and  torpedoes, 
and  that  they  are  ready  for  immediate  use. 

191 


platforms  &70.  Unless  otherwise  instructed,  agents  will 
see  that  lights  in  waiting  rooms  and  on  platforms 
are  kept  burning  at  night.  Where  no  other  pro- 
vision is  made,  know  that  all  signals  are  in  work- 
ing order.  The  keeping  of  switch  and  signal  lights 
in  good  condition  is  of  the  utmost  importance  and 
agents  will  see  that  they  are  so  kept  and  prop- 
erly displayed. 

Designate         871.     Designate  the  place  where  automobiles, 

Vehicles.0  omnibuses  and  other  vehicles,  the  drivers  thereof 
and  persons  representing  hotels,  may  remain  while 
on  company's  property. 

Delivery  872.  Station  agents  are  responsible  for  the 
prompt  delivery  of  United  States  Mail  to  and 
from  post  offices,  also  for  transfer  to  and  from 
connecting  railroads,  when  located  eighty  rods  or 
less  from  the  station. 

Man  873.  See  that  those  carrying  mail  comply  with 

postal  regulations  and  do  not  hang  mail  pouches 
on  mail  cranes  more  than  ten  minutes  before  the 
arrival  of  the  train  for  which  they  are  intended, 
without  reference  to  the  schedule  time  of  trains. 
Mail  delivered  from  moving  trains  must  be  thrown 
off  at  a  designated  place  and  never  on  station 
platforms  or  at  highway  crossings.  Report  all 
failures  in  these  respects  to  the  superintendent. 


on    cranes. 


YARD  MASTERS. 

Report  to.  890.  Yard  masters  report  to  and  receive  their 
instructions  from  the  superintendent  or  train 
master,  and  will  comply  with  instructions  from 
the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

192 


891.  They   will   have    charge   of   the   yards  Jg 
located  in  their  territory,  of  the  men  employed, 
the  movements  of  trains  and  engines,  and  the 
distribution   of   cars   therein.     That   trains   are 
made  up  and  leave  at  the  designated  time;  that 
proper  slips  or  waybills  accompany  each  car;  that 
doors  of  all  loaded  cars  are  properly  secured  and 
sealed;    that    doors    of    all     empty     cars     are 
closed  and  secured;  that  trains  are  made  up  in 
the  order  designated,  that  they  have  the  required 
percentage  of  air  brakes,  and  all  cars  equipped  with 
air  brakes  are  placed  together  first  in  the  train. 

892.  Keep  a  record  of  all  trains  and  cars,  note  Tram 

1  7  record. 

all  irregularities,  and  see  that  reports  of  same  are 
made  to  the  proper  officer. 

893.  Be  familiar  with  the  rules  for  movement  Rules 

for    tram 

of  trains  and  other  rules,  so  far  as  they  relate  in  movement 
any  way  to  the  proper  discharge  of  the  duties  of 
a  yard  master. 

894.  See  that  yards  are  kept  in  good  order;  Jfpe^n 
that  opportunity  is  given  for  the  proper  inspection 

of  cars;  that  such  inspections  are  made,  and  that 
cars  requiring  repairs  are  properly  placed  or  sent 
to  the  shops  as  the  case  may  require. 

When  necessary  to  move  cars  in  bad  order, 
men  doing  the  work  should  be  notified  so  that 
proper  care  will  be  exercised  in  handling  them. 

895.  Report   all   violations   of   rules   coming  Report 
under  their  notice,  also  all  cars  arriving  without  ™ 
proper  waybills,  and  cars  of  freight  received  in 
damaged  condition,  or  improperly  loaded. 

193 


PASSENGER  CONDUCTORS. 

Report  to.  900.  Passenger  conductors  report  to  the 
superintendent  or  train  master.  They  must 
obey  the  orders  of  the  chief  train  dispatcher, 
station  master  and  yard  master,  and  conform  to 
instructions  issued  by  authorized  officers  of  other 
departments. 

They  will  be  responsible  for  the  movement, 
safety,  and  care  of  passengers  and  train,  and  for 
the  vigilance  and  conduct  of  the  men  employed 
thereon,  and  must  report  in  writing  any  mis- 
conduct or  neglect  of  duty.  They  must  see  that 
the  speed  of  their  train  is  properly  governed. 

Duty.  901.     They  must  report  for  duty  at  the  ap- 

pointed time,  when  necessary,  assist  in  making 
up  train;  on  arrival  at  the  terminal  of  the  run 
they  must  remain  in  full  uniform  with  their  train 
until  all  passengers  have  alighted  and  will  see 
that  all  necessary  assistance  is  given  them. 

inspection        902.     Know    that    they    have    all    necessary 

of    trains. 

supplies  and  signals  on  hand  and  ready  for 
immediate  use;  that  train  has  been  inspected,  air 
brakes  and  air  signal  tested  before  leaving  ter- 
minal, and  wherever  train  or  engine  is  changed; 
that  the  couplings,  brakes  and  running  gear  are 
in  good  order;  look  over  the  train  for  anything 
defective  or  in  bad  order,  such  as  windows, 
ventilators,  matting,  seats,  etc.,  and  report  them; 
also  that  the  prescribed  signals  are  correctly 
displayed. 

194 


They  must  familiarize  themselves  with  the 
rules  governing  the  heating,  lighting  and  ventila- 
tion of  cars  and  see  that  they  are  enforced. 

903.  Attend  courteously  to  the  comfort  and 
wants  of  passengers  and  see  that  trainmen  do  the 
same;  that  passengers  are  provided  with  seats; 
that  proper  lighting,  ventilation  and  temperature 
are  maintained,  and  drinking  water  provided. 

In  passing  through  the  dining  cars  the  cap  will 
be  removed. 

Will  not  allow  passengers  to  ride  on  the  plat- 
forms,  in  the  baggage,  express  or  mail  cars,  or  on 
the  engine,  or  violate  in  any  respect  the  regula- 
tions for  their  safety. 

The  doors  of  all  coaches  hauled  in  passenger  Doors 
trains  shall  be  kept  unlocked  while  train  is  in 
motion.     All  toilet  room  doors  must  be  locked 
approaching  and  while   standing  at   important 
stations  and  terminals. 

904.  When  examining  tickets,  inform  passen- 
gers  destined  to  points  on  branch  or  connecting 
lines   at   what   station   they   will   change   cars, 
and  of  the  probable  location  and  leaving  time  of 
the  train  to  which  they  will  change,  and  will 
notify  trainmen  regarding  the  proper  discharge  of 
passengers. 

905.  It  is  the  duty  of  conductors  to  prevent 
passengers  endangering  themselves  by  imprudent 
exposure;  to  protect  passengers  who  are  lawfully 
on    their    trains    from    rudeness,    intoxication, 
threatened  violence,  abusive  or  obscene  language; 
and  any  passenger  acting  in  a  disorderly  manner, 

195 


or  who  annoy  passengers  as  stated  above,  may  be 
removed  from  the  train  at  the  next  regular  open 
station,  but  not  elsewhere,  whether  provided  with 
ticket  or  not.  Use  no  unnecessary  force, 
collect  fare.  906.  Ascertain  that  passengers  are  provided 
with  proper  transportation,  or  collect  fare  from 
all  those  who  are  not. 

to£OTtrain  ^  any  Person  should  refuse  to  produce  proper 
transportation,  or  pay  fare,  cause  the  train  to  be 
brought  to  a  stop  at  a  regular  station,  and  request 
such  person  to  leave  the  train.  In  case  of  refusal 
to  do  so,  remove  them  therefrom. 

It  should  not  be  at  a  station  in  itself  one  where 
by  reason  of  physical  conditions,  in  inclement 
weather  or  at  such  unreasonable  hour  as  might 
ordinarily  endanger  the  health  or  safety  of  the 
person  ejected.  It  must  not  be  a  child,  a  person 
of  unsound  mind,  or  in  such  feeble  or  helpless 
condition  as  to  be  unable  to  take  care  of  himself 
or  herself  at  the  place  of  ejection. 

Each  conductor  will  be  held  responsible  for  the 
exercise  of  reasonable  discretion  in  the  perform- 
ance of  his  duty,  maintaining  self-control,  and 
being  careful  to  use  no  unnecessary  force  that 
might  subject  the  company  to  litigation  or 
annoyance. 

Name  and  When  necessary  to  eject  a  person  from  the  train, 
ascertain,  if  possible,  the  name  and  address  of 
such  person,  and  the  names  and  addresses  of  a 
number  of  passengers  who  witnessed  the  removal 
and  report  the  occurrence  to  the  superintendent 
and  general  claim  agent  on  form  992. 
196 


907.  No  gunpowder,  dynamite,  nitro-glycer-  Explosives 
ine,  gasoline  or  similar  explosive  article,  shall  be 
transported  in  any  car  attached  to  a  passenger 
train. 

908.  Freight  cars  of  any  description,  hauled?™*™  cars 

J  r  In    passenger 

in  passenger  trains,  must  be  placed  next  to  the1™111- 
engine. 

909.  When  a  passenger  train  has  stopped  at  a  fr^inmove' 
station  platform  it  must  not  be  moved  to  take 

coal  or  water  or  do  other  work  until  the  conductor 
permits  by  the  usual  signal. 

Never  permit  the  train  to  be  moved  while 
passengers  are  getting  on  or  off. 

Care  should  be  exercised  in  receiving  and  dis-  andedls.ng 
charging  passengers  to  see  that  they  get  on 
off  safely,  particularly  at  night  or  where  station 
platforms  are  low  or  do  not  extend  to  car  steps, 
and  so  far  as  possible  that  they  do  not  get  on 
or  off  while  train  is  moving. 

910.  See  that  news  agents  do  not  mar  or  JJj 
deface  cars  in  taking  on  or  removing  their  boxes. 
News  agents  will  be  allowed  only  on  passenger 
trains,  and  only  one  upon  any  train.     Each  news 
agent  must  be  provided  with  a  card  or  certificate 
signed  by  the  manager  of  the  news  company, 
attesting  his  employment  by  that  company;  and 
he  must  wear  the  prescribed  uniform  while  on 
duty  on  the  train. 

He  will  be  under  the  supervision  of  the  con- 
ductor, whose  duty  it  is  to  see  that  he  conducts 
himself  properly,  and  that  he  conforms  to  these 

197 


rules.  In  case  of  misbehavior  on  the  part  of  any 
news  agent,  the  conductor  must  report  it  to  the 
superintendent. 

News  agents  will  load  and  unload  their  boxes 
at  the  forward  part  of  the  train,  placing  them  as 
directed,  and  will  use  no  space  needed  for  the  com- 
fort of  passengers.  They  will  be  permitted  to  pass 
quietly  through  the  trains,  and  to  offer  their  wares 
for  sale  in  a  respectful  manner. 

They  may  sell  on  the  trains,  newspapers,  other 
periodicals,  and  books  of  a  respectable  character; 
small  trinkets,  confections,  fruits,  etc.,  also  cigars 
and  tobacco  in  the  smoking  cars.  They  will  not 
be  permitted  to  sell  coffee,  ice  cream,  immoral 
literature  or  pictures,  nor  prize  packages  of  any 
kind. 


They  will  not  be  permitted  to  put  their  wares 
in  the  laps  of  passengers,  nor  upon  the  seats,  nor 
to  cry  them  in  a  loud  voice;  but  in  all  ways  they 
must  avoid  giving  offense  or  causing  annoyance. 
They  will  not  be  permitted  to  play  cards  or  solicit 
card  playing  while  on  trains.  News  agents  will 
not  be  permitted  to  enter  parlor  or  sleeping  cars 
oftener  than  once  each  fifty  miles,  and  will  not 
offer  their  wares  for  sale  unless  first  addressed. 
They  will  not  be  permitted  to  enter  dining  cars 
during  the  serving  of  meals,  or  to  enter  sleep- 
ing cars  after  nine  pm.  Conductors  and  trainmen 
will  see  that  all  of  these  rules  are  fully  observed. 

911.  See  that  as  little  noise  as  possible  is  made 
in  and  about  sleeping  cars. 


198 


912.  All  articles  left  by  passengers  should  be  £jJicd\es 
marked  to  indicate  on  what  date  and  train  they 
were  found  and  by  whom,  and  left  with  station 
master  or  designated  place  at  division  terminal. 

913.  At  stations  at  which  trains  stop  for  meals  Meais. 
announce  in  the  dining  or  lunch  room  notice  of 
departure    in    ample   time   to    allow  passengers 

to  enter  the  train  before  it  starts. 

914.  Only  such  proper  articles,  comprising  a  Hand 
reasonable  amount  of  legitimate  hand  baggage, 

of  passengers,  as  can  be  conveniently  carried  with 
them  in  passenger  cars  without  inconvenience  to 
other  passengers  or  taking  up  space  in  passage 
ways,  will  be  permitted  in  passenger  cars. 
Articles  that  are  unwieldy  as  to  size,  weight, 
shape,  or  otherwise  objectionable,  or  any  un- 
reasonable amount  of  baggage,  that  should  be 
transported  in  baggage  cars  or  by  express,  will  not 
be  permitted  in  passenger  cars. 

Dogs,  birds,  cats  or  other  animals  will  not  be  gog. 
allowed  in  passenger  cars  under  any  circumstances 
but  may  be  carried  in  baggage  or  express  cars, 
where  they  will  be  transported  under  tariff  rates 
and  regulations. 

915.  Each  coach  and  baggage  car  must  be  Tools. 
supplied  with  the  following  tools,  and  conductors 
are  required  to  check  them  over  on  receiving  cars 

at  terminal  and  junction  stations,  on  taking  their 
train  at  starting  point,  and  on  leaving  it  at 
destination,  reporting  all  shortage  or  damage. 


199 


TOOLS  FOR  COACHES. 

1  Axe. 

1  Saw. 

2  Fire  pails. 
1  Sledge. 

1  Cold  chisel. 

4  Hand  fire  extinguishers. 


!•  In  case. 


TOOLS  FOR  BAGGAGE  CARS. 

1  Tool  box. 

1  Switch  chain. 

2  Frogs. 
1  Jack. 

1  Jack  lever. 
1  Sledge. 
1  Axe 
1  Saw 

x    8'  brass  1  Except  in  suburban  train 
x  10*     "      [service.    To  be  carried  in 
2-5      x    9"     "      J  conductors  train  box. 

1  Pail  packing. 

1  Packing  iron. 

1  Packing  hook. 

1  Air  brake  hose. 

1  Air  signal  hose. 

4  bottles  fire  extinguishers. 

1  Stove  shaker       |     In    cars    equipped    with 

1  Fire  shovel         J  stoves. 

1  Steam  hose. 

1  Fire  pail. 

1  Stretcher. 

200 


[     In  dynamo  cars  and  ex- 

1  Cook  cooler        \  elusive    mail    and    express 

(trains. 

IN   WINTER   ALSO: 

2  Scoop  shovels. 

1  or  2  barrels  of  coal. 
1  Track  shovel. 
1  Pail  of  salt. 


TRAIN  BAGGAGEMEN. 

920.  Train  baggagemen  report  to  the  superin-  Report  to. 
tendent  or  train  master.    While  on  duty  they  are 
under  the  direction  of  the  conductor.     At  stations 

they  must  obey  the  orders  of  the  station  master. 
They  must  conform  with  the  instructions  of  the 
general  baggage  agent. 

They   are   responsible   for   the   safety   of   all 
property  entrusted  to  their  care. 

921.  They  must  report  for  duty  at  the  ap- on  duty. 
pointed    time,    handle    baggage    carefully,    and 
remain  in  the  baggage  car  during  the  entire  trip 
except  when  called  upon  to  perform  other  duties; 

also  remain  in  the  car  at  the  end  of  the  trip  until 
all  baggage  and  other  matter  is  delivered  and 
receipted  for  or  transferred  to  a  connecting  train 
baggageman. 

Car  doors  must  be  securely  locked  at  all  times  Doors 

.      locked. 

when  not  in  use,  and  no  person  except  those  in 
performance  of  duty  must  enter  a  baggage  car. 

922.  It  is  their  duty  to  receive,  take  care  of  Not  carry- 
and   correctly   deliver   baggage   carried   on   the 

201 


train;  check  baggage  received  at  stops  where  there 
are  no  agents,  and  ta.ke  up  checks  for  baggage 
delivered  at  such  points.  Keep  all  checks  in 
possession  under  lock  and  key. 

u.  s.  man.  923.  Give  proper  attention  to  the  custody  and 
delivery  of  United  States  Mail  and  report  any 
irregularities  promptly  to  the  superintendent; 
pay  close  attention  to  the  custody  and  delivery 
of  train  mail. 

jHscharsing  924.  Baggagemen,  or  others,  before  dis- 
charging any  baggage,  must  be  sure  that  it  will 
clear  the  train,  and  that  there  is  no  person  or 
object  in  the  way  which  may  be  struck  by  it. 

Not  carry.  925.  Will  not  cajry  anything  unless  it  is  checked 
or  waybilled,  without  permission  from  proper 
authority. 

sPnais  ^^*     H-ave  a  frdl  suPPly  °f  hand  signals  on 

hand  ready  for  immediate  use  if  called  on  to  do 
flagging. 


PASSENGER  TRAINMEN. 

Beport  to.        930.     Passenger  trainmen  report  to  the  super- 
intendent or  train  master. 

When  on  duty  they  are  under  the  direction  of 
the  conductor.  At  stations  they  must  obey  the 
orders  of  the  station  master  or  yard  master. 

They  must  report  for  duty  at  the  appointed 
time,  and  when  necessary  assist  in  making  up 
train. 

Duties.  931.     It  is  their  duty  to  attend  to  the  brakes, 

take  care  of  and  properly  display  train  signals 
at  the  rear  of  the  train  and  have  all  necessary 
202 


supplies  and  signals  on  hand  for  immediate  use; 
attend  to  the  lighting,  heating  and  ventilation  of 
all  coaches,  open  and  close  the  vestibule  and  plat- 
form doors  and  assist  the  conductor  in  the  proper 
disposition  of  the  passengers,  preventing  them  from 
riding  on  platforms  or  in  any  way  violating  the 
regulations  provided  for  their  safety;  to  preserve 
order  and  in  all  things  requisite  for  the  prompt 
and  safe  movement  of  the  train  and  the  comfort 
of  the  passengers. 

932.  Look   over   the   train   carefully   before  inspect 
starting,  and  know  that  all  couplings,  brakes  and 
running  gear  are  in  good  order.     Inspect  the  train 

as  often  as  possible  during  the  trip.  See  that 
water  coolers  are  supplied  with  ice  and  water, 
and  know  that  the  lamps,  whistle  signals,  air 
brakes,  steam  heat  and  all  connections  are  in 
good  working  order.  When  necessary  to  avoid 
delay,  assist  in  handMng  baggage. 

933.  Take  a  position  at  the  car  steps  to  assist 
passengers  in  entering  and  alighting  from  the 
train,  ascertain  destination  of  passengers,  directing 
those  without  tickets  to  the  office. 

934.  The  trainman  acting  as  flagman, 
consider  it    his    especial    duty   to   protect   the 
rear  of  the  train  in  accordance  with  the  rules,  and 
allow  nothing  to  interfere  with  the  prompt  and 
efficient  discharge  of  that  duty.     His  position  on 
the  train  while  running  is  on  the  rear  car.    He 
will  obey  the  signals  from  the  engineman  pre- 
scribed by  the  rules;  but  must  never  wait  for  the 
signal  or  orders  from  the  conductor  when  the 

203 


train  needs  protection.  When  not  required  to 
perform  other  duties  at  station  stops,  occupy  a 
position  on  the  ground  at  the  rear  end  of  train. 

The  front  trainman  must  be  prepared  to 
protect  the  front  of  the  train,  whenever  necessary; 
in  the  absence  of  the  rear  trainman  he  will 
immediately  assume  his  duties. 

orders.  935.     Read  all  train  orders  received  by  the 

conductor. 

Announce         936.     On    leaving    a    station    trainmen    will 

stations. 

announce  in  each  coach  in  a  distinct  voice  the 
next  station  at  which  the  train  will  stop.  If  the 
stop  is  for  meals  they  will  so  state,  giving  the 
length  of  time.  On  approaching  a  point  other 
than  a  station  where  a  train  is  to  be  stopped, 
trainmen  must  announce  it  by  calling  in  each 
coach  "The  next  stop  is  not  a  station."  On 
approaching  a  station  at  which  a  train  stops  to 
discharge  passengers,  trainmen  will  announce 
the  station  in  each  coach;  on  trains  equipped 
with  vestibule  coaches  they  will  announce  the 
direction  passengers  will  take  to  leave  the  train. 
Junction  points  and  terminals  will  be  announced, 
passengers  notified  when  to  change  cars  and 
attention  directed  to  their  parcels  and  other 
articles, 
seating  937.  See  that  passengers  are  provided  with 

passengers.  i  i          i          • 

seats.  Pass  through  sleeping  cars  only  when 
necessary,  exercising  special  care  to  avoid  disturb- 
ing the  occupants. 

In  passing  through  dining  cars  the  cap  will  be 
removed. 

204 


When  not  engaged  in  other  duties  trainmen 
will  sit  near  the  car  door  ready  to  promptly 
respond  to  any  emergency  that  may  be  required. 

938.  On  leaving  a  station  they  will  observe  vestibules, 
whether  there  is  anyone  clinging  to    the    hand 

rails  of  the  vestibules;  if  not,  they  will  close 
vestibule  doors  and  traps,  and  keep  them  closed 
while  train  is  in  motion. 

939.  They  will  place  a  small  chain  across  the  chain  on 

rear   plat- 

opening  of  the  rear  platform  to  the  rear  car  before form- 
leaving  a  terminal,  unless  it  is  protected  by  gates. 

940.  They    must    watch    their    train    veryJJ^tch^^ 
carefully    to    discover   anything  wrong   in    thedefects- 
matter    of    journals,    brakes,   or    other    defects 
liable  to  be  dangerous;  keep  a  sharp  lookout  for 

all  signals  from  the  train  and  from  stations. 
The  rear  trainman  must  ride  on  the  rear  plat- 
form of  the  rear  car  until  his  train  has  passed 
beyond  the  outer  switches,  to  observe  any 
signals  which  may  be  given.  On  trains  con- 
taining non-vestibuled  coaches,  trainman  will, 
on  starting  from  a  station  and  when  approaching  *™™on 
a  station  at  which  stop  is  to  be  made,  take  a'SSoS. 
position  on  the  coach  steps  on  the  side  which 
platform  is  located  and  remain  there  until  the 
entire  train  has  passed  the  outer  end  of  station 
platform.  On  all  trains  they  will  closely  observe 
whether  any  person  attempts  to  get  on  or  off  the 
train  while  in  motion  and  warn  these  persons 
against  making  such  an  attempt. 


205 


SS52311         941.     Suburban  trainmen  will   distinctly   an- 
announce-    nounce  jn  eack  COach  immediately  before  arrival 

of  the  train  at  Chicago,  the  following:  "Do  not 

forget  your  parcels. " 


FREIGHT  CONDUCTORS. 

Report  950.     Freight  conductors  report  to  the  super- 

intendent or  train  master.  They  must  obey  the 
orders  of  the  chief  train  dispatcher  and  yard 
master,  and  conform  to  instructions  issued  by 
authorized  officers  of  other  departments. 

Respond-  They  will  be  responsible  for  the  movement, 
safety  and  proper  care  of  their  train,  and  for  the 
vigilance  and  conduct  of  the  men  employed 
thereon  and  must  report  in  writing  any  mis- 
conduct or  neglect  of  duty. 

ofDet?ain  They  must  see  that  the  speed  of  their  train  is 
properly  governed. 

Appointed  951.  They  must  report  for  duty  at  the  ap- 
pointed time  and  when  necessary  assist  in  making 
up  train. 

SP^ais      ^2.     They  must  know  that  all  necessary  sup- 
and  inspeo-  pj^eg  an(j  signais  are   on   hand   and   ready   for 

immediate  use,  and  that  the  prescribed  signals 
are  correctly  displayed;  that  the  train  has  been 
inspected  before  leaving  terminal  and  that  coup- 
lings, brakes,  running  boards  and  running  gears 
are  in  good  order.  Particular  attention  must  be 
given  to  closing  and  properly  securing  car  doors 
to  avoid  accident.  Cars  with  doors  insecurely 

206 


attached  must  not  be  moved  in  trains;  any  neg- 
lect by  car  inspector  must  be  reported  to  the 
superintendent  at  once.  Trains  must  be  inspected 
as  opportunity  offers  during  trip,  or  at  points 
which  may  be  specified  in  division  time  tables. 
Examine  all  cars  to  be  taken  at  intermediate 
stations  and  if  not  in  safe  condition,  leave  them 
and  report  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher,  giving 
defects.  Attach  defect  cards  to  defective  cars  in 
their  train. 

953.  On  freight  trains    carrying    passengers  Freight 

trains  carry- 

conductors  will  see  that  passengers  are  seated  ^  passen- 
before  the  train  starts  and  remain  seated  until 
the  train  stops  at  the  proper  places  for  them  to 
leave  the  train,  and  will  see  that  they  are  given 
assistance  in  getting  on  and  leaving  the  train, 
and  at  no  time  exposed  to  danger. 

954.  Examine  the  inside  and   outside  of  all 
waybills  for  any  notations  requiring  them  to  set 
out,  weigh  cars,  etc. 

955.  Cutting   off   engine   and   cars   before   a££^t 
train  has  stopped  is  prohibited. 

Cars  must  not  be  detached  from  an  engine 
to  be  run  in  on  side  tracks  where  cars  are  being 
loaded  or  unloaded. 

Running  switches  must  not  be  made  with  cars  EIDIOSI 
loaded  with  explosives;   they  must  not  be  made 
with  cars  loaded  with  live  stock,  when  possible 
to  avoid  it. 

See  that  there  is  a  thorough  understanding 
with  other  crews  that  may  be  switching  at  the 
same  station. 

207 


SSiSgs          Highway    or   public    crossings    must    not    be 

obstructed  by  trains  or  cars. 

Passenger         956.     When  meeting  or  being  passed  by  a 
station.       passenger  train  at  a  station,  they  will  see  that 

their  train  ite  opened  to  allow  free  passage  to  and 

from  the   station,   in   addition   to   opening  the 

street  crossings. 
Bad  or-          957.  They  must  not  set  out  cars  that  are  in 

OOF   cars. 

bad  order,  if  the  necessary  repairs  can  be  made 
or  they  can  be  safely  hauled  to  the  next  car 
repairing  station;  when  hauled  back  of  the 
caboose  they  must  be  chained  as  well  as  coupled; 
they  must  not  be  hauled  behind  a  caboose  at 
night. 

waybills.  958.  Do  not  handle  cars  or  freight  without 
proper  waybills,  or  take  waybills  without  the 
freight  or  cars;  examine  all  cars  forwarded  as 
empty  from  any  station,  and  be  sure  they  do  not 
contain  freight. 

l?v^n  ^59.  Call  attention  of  car  inspector  or  station 
agent  in  his  absence,  to  any  damage  which  may 
have  been  done  to  cars,  which  may  come  to  their 
knowledge,  that  they  may  be  promptly  repaired, 
and  note  these  in  their  reports.  Cars  set  out  in 
bad  order  must  be  reported  at  once  to  the  chief 
train  dispatcher,  stating  number  and  initials, 
contents,  nature  and  extent  of  damage,  and  note 
the  nature  of  defect  on  waybills.  Defect  card 
995  must  be  attached. 

SSing  ^^*     Draw-bars,  brakes,  car  doors,  etc.,  that 

may  be  detached,  should  be  picked  up  and  put 
into  the  car  they  came  from,  or  picked  up  and 

208 


left  with  the  car.  If  this  cannot  be  done,  the 
location  of  parts  must  be  reported  to  the  chief 
train  dispatcher. 

961.  All  journal  bearings,  air  hose  and  coupler  f£rseign 
knuckles  applied   by  trainmen  to   foreign   cars 
must  be  reported  on  form  963,  so  that  they  can 

be  charged  to  the  car  owners. 

962.  Promptly  report  to  the  superintendent  J^ortof  any 
any  lack  of  attention  on  the  part  of  agents,  or attention- 
other  persons,  whose  duty  it  is  to  aid  in  the  passage 

of  trains. 

963.  Chairs  will  not  be  permitted  in  caboose  chairs, 
cars  except  when  immovably  secured. 

964.  Cars  that  in  their  judgment  are  unsafely  cars  unsafe 
loaded,  will  not  be  handled  in  trains  and  the  facts 

must  be  reported  to  the  chief  train  dispatcher. 

965.  When    trains    separate    on    account    of  Defective 

couplings. 

defective  coupling,  report  the  fact  to  the  super- 
intendent, giving  date,  train  and  car  number,  and 
point  at  which  train  parted,  also  specifying  make 
of  coupler  and  nature  of  defects.,  A  similar 
report  should  be  made  in  person  to  car  inspector 
or  his  representative  at  first  terminal. 

966.  When  engines  are  hauled  in  a  train,  place  Engines 

hauled 

at  least  three  cars,  other  than  empty  flats,  be-111  trains- 
tween  engines. 

967.  Except  by  orders  of  the  superintendent,  JjgJjjJ 
engines  must  not  be  hauled  without  side  rods;8ide  rods' 
when   hauled   without   them  the   speed    of  the 
train  must  not  exceed  fifteen  miles  an  hour. 

209 


Refrigerator  968.  When  refrigerator  cars  are  not  in  train  in 
accordance  with  refrigerator  schedule,  notify  the 
chief  train  dispatcher  by  wire  at  once.  Examine 
compartments  for  ice  and  know  that  they  contain 
sufficient  ice  to  carry  car  to  destination.  If  in 
need  of  re-icing  notify  the  chief  train  dispatcher 
and  agent  at  the  first  terminal. 

969.  ^ars  chaining  perishable  property  must 
have  precedence  over  other  freight,  and  must  not 
be  left  short  of  destination,  unless  for  repairs. 

970.  Cars  must  not  be  left  on  passing  tracks 
without  authority  of  chief  train  dispatcher. 

position  or      971.     Conductors  will  station  themselves  upon 

conductor. 

the  train  in  the  best  position  possible  to  enable 
them  to  see  that  their  train  is  intact,  that  their 
trainmen  properly  perform  their  duties,  and  know- 
that  flagmen  go  back  promptly  when  necessary  to 
protect  the  train. 

972.  Each  caboose  car  must  be  supplied  with 
the  following  tools  and  supplies,  and  conductors 
are  required  to  check  them  over  before  starting 
on  a  trip,  reporting  all  shortage  and  damage : 

1  Axe. 

ISaw. 

1  Broom. 

1  Chisel. 

1  Dipper. 

1  Wash  dish. 

1  Hammer. 

1  Pail  journal  packing. 

1  Packing  hook. 

1  Packing  iron. 

210 


1  Journal  box  jack  and  lever. 

1  Cooler  can. 

2  Frogs. 

2  Two  gallon  oil  cans,  filled. 

2  Fillers. 

2  Car  chains. 

1  Coal  hod. 

1  Fire  shovel. 

1  Pound  waste. 

2  Pkgs.  wicks. 

2  Boxes  matches. 

1  Pkg.  "Gold  Dust"  cleaning  powder. 

2  Marker  lamps. 

2  Red  flags  mounted. 

2  Green  marker  flags  mounted. 
1-3%"  x  7"  car  brass. 

2-4M"  x  8"  car  brasses 
2-5"  x  9"  car  brasses. 
2-5j^"  x  10"  car  brasses. 

3  Red  lantern  globes. 

6  White  lantern  globes. 

6  Lantern  frames  and  burners. 

Torpedoes  as  instructed  by  Superintendent. 

Fusees  as  instructed  by  Superintendent. 
2  Air  hose. 
2  Indicator  lamps. 
1  Set  indicator  stencils. 
5  Assorted  coupler  knuckles. 
1-4  ft.  steel  bar. 
1-18"  pipe  wrench. 
1  Back-up  air  pipe. 
12  Air  hose  gaskets. 
1  One  gallon  water  jug. 

211 


FREIGHT  BRAKEMEN. 

uty  1000.  Freight  brakemen  report  to  the  super- 
intendent or  train  master.  When  on  duty  they 
are  under  the  direction  of  the  conductor.  They 
must  obey  the  orders  of  the  yard  master.  They 
must  report  for  duty  at  the  appointed  time  and 
when  necessary  assist  in  making  up  train. 

ct  1001.  Look  over  the  train  carefully  before 

starting,  and  know  that  all  couplings,  brakes, 
ladders,  running  boards  and  running  gear  are  in 
good  order.  Inspect  the  train  as  often  as  possible. 

a,  etc.  !002-  It  is  ^eir  duty  to  attend  to  the  brakes; 
take  care  of  and  properly  display  train  signals  at 
the  rear  of  the  train  and  have  all  necessary  sup- 
plies and  signals  on  hand  for  immediate  use. 

1003.  Read  all  train  orders  received  by  the 

. 

conductor  or  engmeman. 

1004.  Rear  brakemen  must  consider  it  their 
especial  duty  to  protect  the  rear  of  train  in  accord- 
ance with  the  rules,  and  must  allow  nothing  to 
interfere  with  the  prompt  and  efficient  discharge 
of  that  duty.     Obey  the  signals  of  the  engineman 
as  prescribed  by  the  rules;  never  wait  for  signal 
or  orders  from  the  conductor  when  train  needs 
protection.     Watch  the  train  carefully  to  see  that 
it  has  not  parted. 

T  1005.    Front  brakemen  must  be  on  the  look- 

out at  all  times  for  signals,  both  from  the  front 
and  rear  of  train,  and  watch  for  indications  that 
train  has  parted;  carefully  observe  all  fixed  sig- 
nals, also  persons  who  may  walk  across  or  on  the 

212 


track  and  inform  the  engineman.  Their  position 
on  trains  while  running  is  on  the  engine,  except 
when  rules  require  them  to  be  on  cars. 


ENGINE  HOUSE  FOREMEN. 

1020.  Engine  house  foremen  have  charge  of  Duties, 
the  engine  house  and  the  workmen  employed 
therein.     It  is  their  duty  to  see  that  the  engine 
house  is  kept  clean  and  in  good  order;  workmen 
perform  their  duties;  that  supplies  are  economi- 
cally used;  that  engines  are  prepared  for  service 
promptly  and  are  in  good  working  order  and 
properly    equipped;    that    they    are    inspected, 
cleaned  and  reported  for  repairs  when  necessary; 
and  that  enginemen  and  firemen  are  ready  for 
duty  at  the  required  time. 

1021.  When   the   netting   of   any   engine   isNetun« 
reported  by  track  foreman  to  be  inspected,  either 

by  postal  card,  form  786,  or  otherwise,  it  must  be     ' 
promptly  done  and  a  report  made  to  the  master 
mechanic  and  also  to  the  general  claim  agent  on 
blank  form  1592,  accompanied  by  the  notification. 


ENGINEMEN. 

1040.  Enginemen  report  to  the  master  me- Duties, 
chanic  or  road  foreman  of  engines.  They  must 
obey  the  orders  of  the  yard  master  while  in  yards 
making  lone  engine  movements  and  the  conductor 
while  in  train  service  unless  they  endanger  safety 
or  require  violation  of  rules  or  law.  When  at  the 
engine  house  they  are  under  the  direction  of  the 
engine  house  foreman. 

213 


Report. 


Hand 
signaling. 


Imperfect 
signals. 


Starting 
signal. 


Keep 
look-out. 


Riding 
on    engine. 


1041.  They  will  report  for  duty  in  accordance 
with  the  rules  of   the  terminals;  see  that  the 
engine  is  in  good  working  order  and  furnished 
with  necessary  tools,  stores  and  supplies  and  a 
full  set  of  signals;  assist  in  switching  and  making 
up  trains  when  necessary;  examine  the  bulletin 
board  before  starting  and  at  the  end  of  each  trip. 

1042.  Enginemen  must  have  the  proper  ap- 
pliances for  hand  signaling,  as  prescribed  in  Rule 
99,  in  the  engine  cab  ready  for  immediate  use. 
At  night,  the  red  lantern  must  be  lighted  and 
placed  where  it  cannot  be  seen  by  passing  trains. 

1043.  Report  all  switch  or  other  signals  not 
properly  lighted  or  not  properly  displayed. 

1044.  Enginemen    must    under    no    circum- 
stances start  from  a  station  without  a  signal 
from  the  conductor. 

1045.  Keep  a  vigilant  look-out  at  all  times, 
particularly  when  passing  around  curves,  through 
stations  and  yards,  and  must  frequently  look 
back  to  see  that  no  portion  of  the  train  has  be- 
come detached  or  derailed;  also  for  any  signals 
that  may  be  given  by  trainmen  or  others.     They 
must  not  be  so  occupied  as  to  prevent  themselves 
or  firemen  from  keeping  a  constant  look-out  the 
entire  trip. 

1046.  No  one  will  be  allowed  to  ride  on  the 
engine  without  proper  authority,  except  division 
officers,  signalmen,  foremen  of  bridge  and  track 
repairmen  on  their  own    sections,  or    the    con- 
ductor and  brakeman  of  the  train. 


214 


1047.  Use  every  precaution  to  prevent  damage 
by  fire  from    engines.       Report  all   defects   in 
netting,  ash  pans,  etc.,  at  the  end  of  their  run. 
Keep  the   dampers    of    ash    pans  closed    while 
crossing  bridges  or  trestles.     Do  not  permit  ash 
pans   to    be   cleaned    over    signal    connections, 
switches    or    frogs,  in  front   of   stations,  or  on 
crossings.     As   far  as    practicable,    they  should 
be  cleaned  at  the  designated  points  only.     See 
that  ashes  are    wet   down  and   that    they    are 
leveled  to  the  height  of  the  rail. 

1048.  They  must  not  permit  any  unauthorized 
person  to  handle  the  engine;  must  not  leave  it 
during  a  trip  except  in  case  of  necessity,  and  then 
in  charge  of  some  competent  person. 

1049.  Except  when  absolutely  necessary  en-  Engine 


gines  must  not  be  left  standing  within  100  feet  of 
any  street  or  public  crossing,  upon  or  under  any 
bridge,  nor  in  the  vicinity  of  waiting  rooms,  offices, 
or  near  cars  occupied  by  passengers. 

They  will  also  see  that  there  is  no  unnecessary  Jj*5" 
escape  of  steam  from  cylinder  cocks  or  safety 
valves  or  anything  thatVill  cause  the  frightening 
of  horses.     Blow  off  cocks  must  not  be  opened 
in  passing  through  yards  or  over  public  crossings,  , 
except  in  case  of  absolute  necessity. 

1050.     The  whistle  must  not  be  sounded  while  whistle. 
passing  or  being  passed  by  a  passenger  train, 
passing  an  overhead,  underneath  or  public  cross- 
ing at  grade,  except  in  cases  of  emergency  or 
danger,  or  when  required  by    he  rules. 


215 


The  first  blast  of  the  public  crossing  whistle 
14(0  must  be  given  at  the  whistling  post. 

Take  coai        105 1 .    When  freight  trains  of  more  than  twenty 

and    water. 

cars  stop  to  take  coal  or  water,  such  stop  must  be 
made  not  less  than  one  hundred  feet  before  reach- 
ing the  coal  shed,  water  tank  or  stand  pipe,  and  the 
engine  detached,  leaving  the  air  brakes  applied. 

2S£iiesand  1052.  Each  engine  in  service  is  required  to 
carry,  at  all  times,  the  following  tools  and  sup- 
plies, and  enginemen  must  know  that  they  have 
them  and  will  be  held  responsible  for  any  loss  or 
deficiency : 

1-2  Ib.  cast  steel  hammer. 
1-12  inch  monkey  wrench. 
1-18  inch  monkey  wrench. 
1-18  inch  eccentric  set  screw  wrench  for 

eccentric  engines. 
1-8  inch  cold  chisel. 
1-18  inch  set  chisel. 

1  ash  hoe  for  ash  pans  with  side  openings. 
1  steel  coal  hammer. 

1  scoop  shovel  (also  an  old  one  for  emergency). 
1  broom. 
1  iron  water  pail. 
1  packing  iron. 
1  packing  hook. 

1  supply  of  oak  blocking  on  the  small  engines. 
1  assortment  of  bolts  and  nuts. 

1  wrench  for  crank  pin  and  cross-head  pin  nuts. 

2  white  flags  mounted. 

216 


2  green  flags  mounted. 

1  red  flag  mounted. 

6  torpedoes. 

4  fusees. 

1  white  lantern. 

1  red  lantern. 

1  engineer's  oiler. 

1-8  pint  car  oil  can. 

1-8  pint  valve  oil  can. 

1  set  lubricator  glasses  and  gaskets  for  engines 

requiring  them. 
1  water  glass  and  gasket. 
1  torch. 

The  following  may  be  carried  on  engines  when 
considered  necessary  by  master  mechanic,  depend- 
ing on  local  requirements  and  conditions: 

1  slash  bar. 

1  clinker  hook. 

1  engine  truck  brass,  size  to  fit  engine. 

2  tank  truck  brasses,  size  to  fit  engine. 


FIREMEN. 

1060.     Firemen  report  to  the  master  mechanic  Report  to. 
or  road  foreman  of  engines.     When  at  the  en- 
gine house  they  are  under  the  direction  of  the 
engine  house  foreman. 

They  will  report  for  duty  in  accordance  with 
the  rules  of  the  terminals,  and  obey  the  orders  of 
the  engineman  respecting  the  proper  use  of  fuel 
and  the  manner  of  performing  their  work. 


217 


Bulletin 
boards. 


Train 
orders. 


Charge 
of    engine. 


Not    run 
engine. 


1061.  Examine    the    bulletin    board    before 
starting  on  each  trip,  and  be  familiar  with  all 
special  orders  pertaining  to  their  trains  or  engines. 
Keep  a  constant  look-out  when  not  engaged  in 
firing  and  give  instant  notice  to  the  engineman 
of  any  danger  signals  or  obstructions  on  the  track. 

1062.  Read  all  train  orders  received  by  the 
engineman. 

1063.  Take  charge  of  the  engine  in  the  absence 
of  the  engineman,  and  not  leave  it  until  his  return, 
nor  permit  any  unauthorized  person  to  be  upon  it. 

1064.  They  must  not  run  an  engine  in  the 
absence  of  the  engineman  without  instructions 
from    the    master    mechanic,    unless    in    some 
emergency  they  are  instructed  to  do  so  by  the 
conductor,  or  some  officer  in  authority. 

1065.  In  case  the  engineman  becomes  dis- 
abled, the  fireman  must  stop  the  train  and  report 
to  the  conductor. 


AIR  BRAKE  &  TRAIN  AIR  SIGNAL 
INSTRUCTIONS. 

successful  1070.  As  safety  depends  on  the  successful 
working  of  the  air  brake,  it  is  of  the  utmost 
importance  that  all  its  parts  be  in  perfect  work- 
ing order,  and  that  employes  having  anything 
to  do  with  the  brake  be  perfectly  familiar  with 
its  manner  of  operation. 

Attend  All  such  employes  will  be  required  to  attend 

instruction,  the  school  of  instruction  held  in  the  company's 
air-brake  instruction  car. 


218 


1071.  The    following    rules    cover    only    t 
general    operation    of    air   brakes   and    will    be 
changed  by  special  instructions  when  required. 

1072.  Cars    in    passenger    trains    must    be  Air  brake. 
equipped  with  air  brakes  and  air  signals,  which 

must  be  coupled  and  connected  with  the  engine. 

1073.  A  passenger  train  must  not  leave  a  Brakes 

.  .         .111  cut  out- 

terminal  or  division  point  with  brakes  on  any 

car  cut  out,  or  in  defective  condition,  without 
permission  of  the  proper  officer. 

1074.  At  least  the  percentage  required  by  law,  Percj£ta*e 
as  shown  on  division   time   tables,  of  the  total required- 
number  of  cars  in  freight  trains,  must  be  equipped 

with  air  brakes  which  must  be  coupled,  connected 
with  the  engine  and  operated,  and  all  air 
brake  cars  which  are  associated  together  with 
such  percentage,  shall  have  their  air  brakes 
connected  and  operated. 

1075.  In    passenger    service    one    sufficient  Brake  pipe 

r  °  reduction. 

reduction  of  brake  pipe  pressure  must  be  made 
within  1000  feet  from  starting  point  at  terminals 
or  points  where  brake  pipe  connections  have 
been  separated,  to  assure  that  all  brakes  are 
operating  properly. 

1076.  Enginemen   taking   engines   must    see  A^  on  en- 
that  the  air  brake  apparatus  on  the  engine  and  ^ 
tender  is  in  a  safe  and  suitable  condition  for 
service;  that  the  air  pump  and  lubricator  work 
properly;  that  the  regulator  prevents  the  brake- 
pipe  pressure  from  varying  from  the  authorized 
pressure;  that  an  excess  pressure  of  not  less  than 
twenty  pounds  can  be  maintained  in  the  main 

219 


reservoir  when  the  handle  of  the  engineman's 
brake  valve  is  placed  in .  the  running  position 
and  that  the  brake  valve  works  properly  in  all 
positions  of  the  handle;  that  the  water  has  been 
drained  from  the  air  brake  system  and  that  when 
the  brakes  are  fully  applied  the  piston  travel  on 
engine  and  tender  do  not  exceed  the  following 
limits: 

Cam  type  driver  wheel  brake V  to  3J^" 

Other  type  of  driver  wheel  brakes  . .  .  4"  to  6     " 

Engine  truck  brakes 6"  to  8     " 

Tender  brake 6"  to  9     " 

They  must  also  test  the  independent  brake 
and  the  air  signal  on  engines  so  equipped,  the 
latter  by  making  a  slight  opening  in  the  stop- 
cock of  the  signal  train  line  and  noting  proper 
whistle  response. 

HOW  to^  1077.  Start  air  pump  slowly  to  work  con- 
pump>  densation  out  of  steam  cylinder,  then  apply  a  few 
drops  of  cylinder  oil  through  the  steam  lubricator 
to  the  steam  cylinder.  To  supply  air  to  the  train 
the  pump  should  be  run  at  a  medium  speed,  but 
not  fast  enough  to  cause  excessive  heating.  If 
the  air  cylinder  needs  oil,  use  sparingly  through 
the  oil  cup  on  top  of  air  cylinder  a  small  quantity 
of  valve  oil,  but  never  through  the  air  valves. 
Keep  a  good  swab  on  the  piston  rod. 

SSS*  1078.     Enginemen    must    thoroughly    inspect 

equipment.    ^  ajr  j^gj^g  an(j  signaj  equipment  and  report 

on  proper  form  to  round  house  foreman  at  end 

of  run  or  day's  work,  any  defect  they  may  find. 

220 


1079.  The  brake  pipe  under  the  tender 

be  blown  out  thoroughly  before  connecting  to under  tend 
the  train.  There  should  be  full  maximum 
main  reservoir  pressure  on  the  engine  when 
making  this  connection.  When  the  train  has 
been  charged  to  the  authorized  brake  pipe 
pressure,  the  engineman  shall,  at  a  signal  from 
the  inspector  or  trainmen,  apply  the  brakes  with 
full  service  application  of  not  less  than  twenty-five 
pounds  reduction,  and  leave  them  so  applied 
until  the  brakes  on  the  entire  train  have  been 
inspected  and  release  signal  given.  He  shall 
then  release  the  brakes,  and  not  start  the  train 
until  inspector  or  trainman  informs  him  all  brakes 
are  released  and  their  general  condition;  also  the 
location  of  loaded  and  empty  cars.  This  test 
must  be  made  after  each  change  in  the  make  up 
of  the  train. 

When  a  train  is  to  be  handled  by  a  back-up  gj0^. 
hose,    enginemen   must    observe    the    reduction 
made  by  the  train  men  in  making  a  test,  as 
indicated  by  the  air  gauge. 

1080.  Passenger   trains   running    at    a    high  SSn 
rate  of  speed  must  be  stopped  with  two  applica- 
tions of  the  brakes,  except  trains  equipped  for 
graduated  release.    A  sufficient  application  should 

be  made  while  the  speed  is  high  to  bring  the  train 
under  perfect  control,  and  after  releasing,  a  second 
light  application  should  be  made  to  complete 
the  stop. 

On  passenger  trains  of  nine  cars  or  less,  release 
the  brake  shortly  before  stopping,  except  on  heavy 

221 


or  moderate  down  grades,  where  after  releasing, 
apply  the  brakes  lightly  to  prevent  the  train 
starting.  When  over  nine  cars,  hold  the  brakes 
lightly  applied  until  the  train  stops,  to  prevent 
the  train  parting.  A  second  engine  will  be 
counted  the  same  as  two  cars. 

Freight  1081.     With  freight  trains  first  allow  slack  to 

train 

brakes.  run  Up  against  the  engine.  Great  care  must  then 
be  taken  to  apply  the  brakes  with  the  proper 
reduction,  according  to  the  speed  and  length  of 
train,  and  not  make  a  second  reduction  until  the 
effect  of  the  first  is  felt  on  the  entire  train,  in 
order  or  prevent  shocks. 

siow  speed.  Do  not  release  the  brakes  on  freight  trains  at 
slow  speed,  but  preferably  bring  the  train  to  a 
full  stop. 

Releasing  1082.  To  release  brakes  move  handle  of 
engineman's  valve  to  full  release  and  return  it  to 
running  position.  Good  judgment  should  be 
used  by  leaving  the  handle  in  full  release  longer 
for  a  long  train  than  for  a  short  train,  always 
returning  the  handle  to  running  position  soon 
enough  to  allow  the  brake  pressure  to  reduce 
below  the  authorized  pressure  before  auxiliaries 
overcharge. 

second  On  long  trains,  after  returning  the  handle  to 

release.  '  ' 

running  position,  leave  it  there  a  few  seconds, 
then  make  a  second  light  release  to  insure  the 
release  of  the  forward  brakes  that  usually  re-apply. 

Emergency        1083.     Emergency  application  of  brakes  must 

application.  . 

not  be  used  except  in  actual  emergencies. 

222 


1084.  If  the  brake  be  found  dragging  at  any 
time  without  a  rapid  fall  of  the  black  pointer, 
move  the  handle  of  the  engineman's  valve  into 
full  release  position  for  a  second,  and  then  return 
it  to  the  running  position.     If  the  brake  will  not 
respond,  apply  the  brake  and  then  release.     If, 
however,  the  brakes  go  on  suddenly,  except  when 
backing  with  back-up  hose,  with  a  fall  of  the  black 
pointer,  it  is  evident  that  (a)  a  conductor's  valve 
has  been  opened,  (6)  a  hose  has  burst  or  other 
serious  leak  has  occurred,  or  (c)  the  train  has 
parted.     In  such  event,  place  the  handle  immedi- 
ately on  "lap"  position,  to  prevent  the  escape 
of  air  from  the  main  reservoir,   and  leave  it 
"lapped"  until  defect  has  been  remedied  and 
release  signal  given. 

1085.  The  engine  and  tender  brakes,  unless  Bn«ine 
defective,  must  be  used  automatically  at  every 
application  of   train  brakes.     When  a  brake  is 
defective  so  that  it  should  not  be  operated,  the 
particular  brake  defective  should  be^cut  out. 

1086.  When  two  or  more  engines  are  coupled 
together  in  one  train,  brakes  must  be  connected 
through  to  and  operated  from  the  head  engine. 
For  this  purpose  a  cut-out  cock  is  placed  in  the 
brake  pipe  just    below  the  engineman's  valve. 
The  engineman  of  each  engine  except  the  head 
one,  must  close  this  cut-out  cock  and  place  the 
handle  of  his  valve  in  the  running  position,  keep 
air  pump  running,  maintaining  air  pressure  on  his 
engine,  thus  enabling  him  to   assume  charge  of 
the  train  brakes  should  occasion  require. 

223 


Air-pump  1087.  If  air  pump  stops  it  can  often  be  started 
to  work,  by  ciosing  the  throttle  and  opening  it  quickly. 
If  an  air  pump  stops  frequently  take  off  the  cap 
and  apply  a  little  cylinder  oil.  If  this  does  not 
start  the  pump  remove  the  reversing  piston  (side 
cap)  and  see  if  the  packing  rings  are  broken;  if 
so,  remove  the  broken  pieces,  wrap  with  candle 
wicking,  oil  and  restart  pump.  Occasionally  the 
nuts  come  off  the  main  piston'  rod  in  the  air 
cylinder,  or  the  reversing  plate  bolts  get  loose 
in  the  steam  cylinder;  this  may  also  cause  the 
pump  to  stop.  Generally  time  permits  of  only 
the  first  few  things  being  done.  Notify  the  con- 
ductor immediately  if  the  air  pump  will  not  work 
so  the  train  can  be  controlled  by  the  hand  brakes 
to  a  place  where  decision  will  be  made  as  to 
whether  you  shall  proceed  with  the  train. 

d™angedalve  1088.  If  brake  valve  be  so  deranged  that  the 
equalizing  reservoir  leaks  badly,  is  broken  off,  or 
the  equalizing  piston  sticks  up  and  will  not  seat, 
place  a  blind  gasket  in  the  connection  to  the 
engineman's  brake  valve  leading  to  the  equalizing 
reservoir  or  plug  up  the  opening;  put  a  plug  in 
the  train  line  exhaust  elbow;  and  do  your  braking 
with  the  emergency  position  carefully  to  avoid 
jerking. 

coupling  to      1089.     When  coupling  to  train  or  taking  extra 

train  on 

picking  up  carg^  appiy  brakes  on  cars  already  coupled  to  the 
engine,  leave  the  handle  in  lap  position  until  the 
cocks  are  open,  then  release  all  brakes  and  charge 
the  train. 

224 


1090.  In    descending    grades    apply    brake 
lightly  before  speed  increases  very  much;  keep 
speed  low  and  the  brake  pipe  and  auxiliary  pres- 
sures as  high  as  possible,  taking  advantage  of  let- 
ups and  curves  to  recharge.     When  recharging 
on  a  grade  place  the  handle  in  full  release  until 
the   auxiliaries   have   time   to   recharge   to   the 
authorized  pressure. 

1091.  When    backing    passenger   trains    and  Backing 

'      ^  passenger 

back-up  hose  is  to  be  used  by  trainmen,  thetrains- 
engineman  must  carry  the  brake  valve  in  run- 
ning position.  Following  either  a  stop  or  slow 
down,  and  signal  is  given  to  continue  backing, 
the  handle  of  the  brake  valve  should  be  moved 
as  in  making  a  regular  brake  release. 

On  grades  where  a  train  will  not  stand  with  On  ^ades. 
brakes  released,  the  train  should  be  held  with  the 
straight  air  brakes  of  the  engine,  or,  in  its  absence, 
by  admitting  steam  to  the  cylinders  with  the 
engine  reversed. 

The    engineman   must   apply   the   automatic  ^ematic 
brake  whenever  in  his  judgment  it  is  required  to 
insure  the  safety  of  the  train. 

1092.  In  Passenger  Service:  When  trains  are  fr^esnger 
approaching  a  terminal  station,   end  of  double  tae?min\cihlng 
track,  junction  point,  railway  crossing  at  grade, 

draw  bridge,  heavy  descending  grade,  or  any 
point  of  possible  danger,  engineman  shall  make 
a  two  mile  limit  air  brake  test  consisting  of 
an  eight  to  ten  pound  reduction  of  air  pressure, 
and] judging  the  resultant  holding  power  of  the 

225 


cars. 


brakes,  as  well  as  observing  the  length  of  blow  from 
the  brake-pipe  exhaust  of  the  automatic  brake 
valve. 

fct  In  Freight  Service:    Enginemen    must   know 

that  the  required  pressure,  which  will  be  indi- 
cated by  the  air  gauge,  is  maintained  at  all 
times.  Conductors  must  give  such  observance 
to  the  air  pressure,  indicated  by  the  air  gauge 
located  in  the  caboose,  as  will  insure  against  the 
possibility  of  a  closed  angle  cock,  or  insufficient 
pressure  from  any  cause,  and  must  continuously 
observe  the  air  gauge  while  descending  heavy 
grades,  or  places  of  extra  hazard.  Should  the  air 
pressure  as  indicated  by  the  air  gauge  in  the 
caboose  indicate  possible  danger,  the  conductor 
must  take  precautionary  measures  to  insure  safety 
by  information  conveyed  to  the  engineman,  the 
application  of  air  brakes  by  the  conductor's 
valves,  or  by  hand  brakes,  as  may  be  necessary. 

air  When  a  car  not  equipped  with  air  brakes  or 
brake  pipe  broken  is  hauled  in  a  freight  train 
ahead  of  caboose,  the  conductor  must  so  inform 
the  engineman,  who  will  then  be  required  to 
make  a  two  mile  limit  air  brake  test  approaching 
a  station,  end  of  double  track,  junction  point, 
railway  crossing  at  grade,  draw  bridge,  heavy 
descending  grade,  or  any  point  of  possible  danger, 
by  applying  the  brakes  with  sufficient  reduction 
of  air  to  assure  himself  of  their  holding  power 
and  that  he  has  proper  control  of  the  train;  this 
will  be  done  without  reliance  upon  the  exhaust 
from  the  automatic  brake  valve.  If  not  assured 

226 


he  has  power  control,  and  the  speed  and  length 
of  the  train  renders  it  unsafe  to  release  brakes,  he 
will  hold  them  applied  until  the  train  stops. 

1093.  When  engine  has  been  coupled  to  train, Testing  air- 
or  two  sections  have  been  coupled  together,  the 
brake  and  signal  couplings  must  be  united,  the 

angle  cocks  in  the  pipes — both  brake  and  signal — 
must  be  open,  except  those  at  the  rear  end  of  the 
last  car,  which  must  be  closed.  After  the  train  has 
been  charged  with  air,  signal  must  be  given  to 
apply  the  brakes,  as  provided  for  in  the  train 
rules.  When  this  has  been  done  brakes  on  each 
car  must  be  examined  to  see  if  they  are  properly 
applied.  When  it  is  ascertained  that  each  brake  is 
applied  the  engineman  must  be  signaled  to  release 
the  brakes.  When  the  train  air  signal  is  in  use 
the  signal  to  the  engineman  to  apply  the  brakes 
should  be  given  from  a  car  as  near  the  forward 
end  of  the  train  as  possible  and  to  release  brakes 
from  the  rear  car;  both  by  use  of  the  air  signal. 
The  brakes  of  each  car  must  then  be  examined 
to  see  that  each  is  released. 

In  addition,  when  a  train  is  to  be  handled  with  J*ckh08e. 
a  back-up  hose,  trainmen  must  make  a  test  with 
the  back-up  hose. 

1094.  If   defect   be   discovered    it   must    be  AIT  defects, 
remedied  and  brakes  tested  again — the  operation 

being  repeated  until  it  is  ascertained  that  every- 
thing is  right.     The  engineman  must  then  be 
notified  that   the  brakes  are  working  properly. 
227 


Aching  1095.  When  detaching  engine  or  cars  first 
close  the  cocks  in  the  brake  pipes  at  the  point  of 
separation,  and  then  part  the  couplings  invariably 
by  hand. 

Frozen  1096.  If  couplings  are  found  frozen  together 

or  covered  with  an  accumulation  of  ice,  the  ice 
must  first  be  removed  and  then  the  coupling 
thawed  out  to  prevent  injury  to  the  gaskets. 

1097.  If  brakes  stick  or  wheels  slide,  engine- 
man  must  be  signaled  as  per  rule  16  (m).     If 
engineman  cannot  release  brakes,  or  if  brakes  are 
applied  to  detached  cars,  the  release  may  be 
effected  by  opening  the  bleed  cock  in  the  auxiliary 
reservoir  until  the  air  begins  to  release  through 
the  triple  valve,  with  the  LN  brake  until  the 
brake  is  entirely  released,  when  the  reservoir  cock 
must  be  immediately  closed.     Brakes  not  releas- 
ing might  be  caused  by  the  brake  not  being  cut 
in  at  angle  cock,  or  retainer  turned  up. 

1098.  Should  a  train  break  in  two  or  more 
parts,  first  close  the  angle  cock  at  the  rear  of 
the  first  section  and    signal  the   engineman  to 
release  the  brakes.     Having  coupled  to  the  second 
section,  observe  the  rule  for  making  up  trains — 
first  being  sure  that  the  angle  cock  at  the  rear  of 
the  second  section  has  been  closed,  if  the  train 
has  been  broken  into  more   than  two   sections. 
When  the  engineman  has  released  the  brakes  on 
the  second    section,  the  same  method   must  be 
employed  with    reference  to  the    third   section, 
and  so  on.     When  the  train  has  been  recoupled 
brakes  must  be  inspected  and  each  released  before 
proceeding. 

228 


1099.  If,  through  defect  of  brake  apparatus  cut  out  car. 
while  on  the  road,  it  becomes  necessary  to  cut 
out  the  brake  upon  any  car,  it  may  be  done  by 
closing  the  cock  in  the  cross-over  pipe  near  the 
center  of  the  car  where  the  quick-acting  brake 
is  used.  When  the  brake  has  thus  been  cut  out, 
the  cock  in  the  auxiliary  reservoir  must  be 
opened  and  left  open  upon  passenger  cars,  or 
held  open  until  all  air  has  escaped  from  the 
reservoir  upon  freight  cars.  The  brake  must 
never  be  cut  out  upon  any  car  unless  the  appa- 
ratus is  defective,  and  when  it  is  necessary 
to  cut  out  a  brake,  the  conductor  must  notify 
the  engineman  and  also  report,  stating  the 
reason. 


1100.  Should  it  be  necessary  to  apply  brakes 
from  the  train,  it  may  be  done  by  opening  con- 
ductor's valve.     The  valve  must  be  held  open 
until  the  train  comes  to  a  full  stop,  and  then 
must  be  closed.     This  method  of  stopping  the 
train  must  not  be  used  except  in  case  of  emerg- 
ency. 

1101.  If  a  brake  pipe  hose  should  burst,  it 
must  be  replaced  and  the  brakes  tested  before 
proceeding,  providing  the  train  is  in  a  safe  place. 
If  it  is  not,  the  cock  immediately  in  front  of  the 
burst  hose  must  be  closed,  and  the   engineman 
signaled  to  release.     All  the  brakes  to  the  rear  of 
the  burst   hose  must    be  released   by  hand,  and 
the  train  proceed  to  a  safe  place  where  the  burst 
hose  must  be  replaced    and  brakes    again  con- 
nected and  tested  as  in  making  up  train. 

229      • 


Conductor's 
ralre. 


itetahiing  1102.  When  the  pressure-retaining  valve  is  to 
be  used,  the  trainmen  must,  at  the  top  of  the 
grade,  test  the  brakes  upon  the  whole  train,  and 
must  then  pass  over  the  train  and  turn  the  handle 
of  the  pressure-retaining  valves  horizontally  upon 
all  or  part  of  the  cars,  as  may  be  directed.  At 
the  foot  of  the  grade  the  handles  must  all  be 
turned  down  again.  Special  instructions  will  be 
issued  as  to  the  grades  upon  which  these  valves 
are  to  be  used. 

Discharge  1103.  In  making  up  trains,  couplings  and  car 
discharge  valves  on  the  cars  must  be  examined 
to  see  all  are  tight.  Should  the  car  discharge  valve 
upon  any  car  be  found  defective  while  on  the  road, 
it  may  be  cut  out  of  use  upon  that  car  by  closing 
the  cock  in  the  branch  pipe  leading  to  the 
valve.  The  conductor  must  be  notified  when 
the  signal  has  been  cut  out  upon  any  car,  and  he 
must  report  the  same  for  repairs.  In  using  the 
signal,  pull  directly  down  upon  the  cord  during 
one  full  second,  for  each  intended  blast  of  the 
signal  whistle,  and  allow  two  seconds,  or  more  on 
long  trains,  to  elapse  between  the  pulls. 

Report  to        1104.    Any  defect  in  air  brake  or  air  signal 

inspector. 

apparatus  discovered  upon  the  road  must  be 
reported  to  the  inspector  at  the  end  of  the  run, 
or,  if  the  defect  be  a  serious  one  in  passenger 
service,  it  must  be  reported  to  the  nearest  in- 
spector, and  be  remedied  before  the  car  is  again 
placed  in  service. 

AJJ  brake  1105.  When  making  up  trains  at  terminals, 
all  air  brake  cars  should  be  switched  ahead  and 

230 


operated.  While  passenger  trains  are  charging, 
brakeman  or  inspector  must  pull  each  car  dis- 
charge valve  to  see  that  air  signal  is  cut  in  on 
each  car.  When  switching  passenger  cars  occu- 
pied by  passengers  or  adding  to  passenger  trains 
the  air  brake  must  be  coupled  up  and  used  on 
cars  being  handled;  this  is  to  insure  safety,  also 
it  charges  auxiliaries,  and  brakes  can  be  tested 
immediately. 

1106.     A  back-up  hose  must  be  used  for  back- Back 

up    hose. 

ing  all  passenger  trains,  whether  loaded  or  empty, 
and  one  or  more  experienced  trainmen  must  be 
on  the  rear  platform  of  rear  car. 

All  back-up  hose  must  have  a  valve  with  a  ^t- 
inch  minimum  opening,  and  a  warning  whistle. 

When  back-up  hose  is  to  be  used,  its  connections  gjj™*011 
must  be  tested  by  making  through  its  valve  a 
reduction  of  brake-pipe  pressure  before  the  train 
is  moved  and  the  engineman  will  require  this 
test  before  backing  train;  also  a  running  test 
must  be  made  by  use  of  the  valve  in  the  back-up 
hose  within  200  feet  after  train  has  started  back, 
bringing  the  train  to  a  stop  against  the  working 
of  the  engine  and  if  this  is  not  done  the  engine- 
man  will  stop  the  train  within  300  feet  of  start- 
ing point. 

The  engineman  will  require  the  above  tests  to 
be  made  before  proceeding. 

When  making  a  stop  with  the  back-up  hose,  M*ke  test 
the  opening  of  the  valve   should   be  gradually 
increased  until  the  train  has  slowed  down  as 
much  as  desired  or  has  stopped,  if  required. 
231 


Avoid  The  valve  in  back-up  hose  should  be  opened 

emergency  . 

application,  slowly  to  avoid  the  emergency  application,  except 
in  case  of  emergency,  when  it  must  be  quickly 
opened  wide  and  left  open.  When  this  valve  is 
closed  the  brakes  will  release  and  re-charge  from 
the  engine. 

Defect  1107.     Trainmen  must  keep  on  hand  several 

cards. 

air  brake  defect  cards,  and  when  they  find  an  air 
brake  or  air  signal  inoperative  and  it  cannot  be 
repaired  immediately,  they  shall  apply  a  card, 
according  to  instructions.  Car  repairers  and  in- 
spectors will  immediately  proceed  to  put  it  in 
proper  repair  and  detach  card  when  found  to  be 
in  good  working  order.  Conductors  will  be  held 
responsible  for  leaving  trains  at  destination 
terminals  with  air  cut  out  and  no  defect  card, 
when^  1108.  When  picking  up  air  brake  cars,  cut  in 

^  **•  air  when  making  draw-bar  coupling;  before  open- 
ing angle  cock  see  that  rear  cock  is  closed.  The 
cars  will  be  charging  while  going  back  to  trains. 
Before  moving  cars  on  the  side  track  or  starting 
from  terminal,  care  should  be  exercised  to  see 
that  hand  brakes  are  off,  shoes  not  frozen  to 
wheels,  and  retainers  down. 

LN  brakes.  1109.  When  passenger  trains  equipped  with 
LN  brakes  are  to  be  switched,  or  when  road 
engines  are  to  be  changed,  the  engineman  will 
make  a  twenty  pound  reduction  of  brake  pipe 
pressure  and  leave  the  brakes  applied,  before  the 
angle  cock  between  train  and  engine  tank  are 
closed.  This  to  permit  the  engineman  of  the 
receiving  engine  to  release  the  brakes  and  avoid 

232 


delay  caused  by  brakes  sticking.  Trainmen  and 
yardmen  will  not  close  angle  cocks  for  the  purpose 
of  changing  engines  until  engineman  has  made 
this  reduction. 

1110.  Hand  brakes  should  be  set  at  rear  end  Backing  up. 
of  train  only  when  backing  up  to  keep  slack  from 
running  out,  or  upon  a  call  for  brakes.     When 
setting  out  air  brake  cars  bleed  the  auxiliary 
reservoir  before  setting  up  hand  brakes. 

1111.  It  is  the  duty  of  enginehouse  foremen  ?fs°Deecrtion 
to  see  that  air  brake  and  signal  equipment  is 
properly  inspected  upon  each  engine.     It  must 

be  ascertained  that  all  pipe  joints,  connections 
and  all  other  parts  of  the  apparatus  are  air  tight, 
and  in  good  working  order,  cleaned  and  lubricated 
at  proper  intervals  and  pressure  regulators  ad- 
justed to  the  authorized  pressure. 

1112.  Air  pumps  must  be  tested  under  pres- At^pump 
sure,  and  if  found  to  be  working  imperfectly  in 

any  respect,  must  be  put  in  a  thoroughly  service- 
able condition. 

1113.  Driver  and  tender  brakes  must  be  so^jj 
adjusted  that  the  piston  travel  will  be  within  the adjusted- 
following  limits: 

Cam  type  driver  wheel  brake 2"  to  3%" 

Other  forms  of  driver  wheel  brake. .  .  4"  to  6" 

Engine  truck  brake 6"  to  8" 

Tender  brake 6"  to  9" 

When  the  cam  brake  is  used,  care  must  becam  brake- 
taken  to  adjust  both  cams  alike  so  that  the  point 
of  contact  of  the  cams  will  be  in  line  with  the 
piston  rod. 

233 


The  tender  brake  must  be  adjusted  by  means 
of  the  dead  truck  levers  or  bottom  rods,  corres- 
ponding levers  on  the  two  trucks  have  a  like 
angle  and  that  the  travel  does  not  exceed  the  long 
and  short  limits. 

1114.  The  main  reservoir,  and  also  drain  cup 
in  brake  pipe  under  tender,  must  be  drained  of 
any  accumulation  after  each  trip.     The  auxiliary 
reservoirs  and  triple  valves  must  also  be  drained 
frequently,  and  daily  in  cold  weather,  and  the 
brake  pipe  under  the  engine  and  tender  blown 
out. 

1115.  The    air    signal    apparatus    must    be 
examined  and  tested  by  suitable  appliances  from 
both  front  of  the  engine  and  rear  of  tender,  to 
know  that  the  whistle  responds  properly. 

1116.  It  is  the  duty  of  all  inspectors  to  see 
that  couplings,  pipe  joints,  triple  valves,  con- 
ductor's valves,  air  signal  valve,  and  all  other 
parts  of  the  brake  and  signal  apparatus  are  in 
good  order  and  free  from  leaks.     For  this  pur- 
pose they  must  be  tested  under  the  full  air  pres- 
sure as  used  in  service.     No  passenger  train  must 
be  allowed  to  leave  a  terminal  station  with  the 
brake  upon  any  car  cut  out,  or  in  defective  con- 
dition, without  special  orders  from  the  proper 
officer.     If  a  defect  be  discovered  in  the  brake 
apparatus  of  a  freight  car,  which  cannot  be  held 
long  enough  to  give  time  to  correct  such  defect, 
the  brake  must  be  cut  out  and  the  car  properly 
carded,  to  call  the  attention  of  the  next  inspector 
to  the  repairs  required. 

234 


1117.  Freight  trains  on  arrival  at  terminals 
where  inspectors  are  stationed  to  make  immedi- 
ate  brake  inspection  and  repairs,  shall  have  slack 
stretched  and  left  with  brakes  fully  applied. 

1118.  In  making  up  trains,  couplings  must  be^ai^  al 
united  and  cocks  at  ends  of  cars  all  opened, 
except  at  the  rear  end  of  the  last  car,  where  the 
cocks  must  be  closed;  the  inspector  or  trainman 
must  know  that  the  air  is  passing  through  the 
pipes  to  the  rear  end.     After  the  train  is  fully 
charged,  the  engineman  must  be  signaled  to  apply 

the  brake.  When  the  brakes  have  been  applied, 
they  must  be  examined  upon  each  car  to  see  that 
they  are  applied  with  proper  piston  travel.  This 
having  been  ascertained,  the  inspector  or  train- 
man must  signal  the  engineman  to  release  brakes, 
using  the  train  air  signal  from  the  rear  car  dis- 
charge valve,  upon  passenger  train.  He  must 
then  again  examine  the  brakes  upon  each  car  to 
note  that  each  is  released.  If  any  defect  be  dis- 
covered, it  must  be  corrected  and  the  testing  of 
the  brakes  repeated  until  they  work  properly. 
He  must  then  inform  both  the  engineman  and 
the  conductor  of  the  number  of  cars  with  brakes 
in  good  order.  This  examination  must  be  re- 
peated if  any  change  be  made  in  the  make  up 
of  the  train  before  starting. 

1119.  Inspectors  will  be  held  strictly  respon-  inspectors 
sible  for  the  good  condition  of  all  brake  and  signal 
apparatus  upoir  cars  placed  in  trains.     They  will 

also  make  any  examination  of  brake  apparatus 
or  repairs  to  the  same,  which  they  may  be  called 
upon  to  do  by  train  men. 
235 


GENERAL  MAINTENANCE  RULES. 

Location.  1140.  Foremen,  maintainers  and  repairmen  in 
bridge,  track,  signal,  telegraph  and  telephone 
work  must  keep  their  headquarters  advised  of 
their  location  and  respond  promptly  when  called. 

at°ionper~  1141.  Employes  in  the  several  branches  of 
work  will  at  all  times  co-operate,  and  when 
necessary,  assist  each  other  in  maintenance  work. 

Duties.  1142.     They  will  have  charge  of  men  directly 

under  them;  examine  and  know  that  they  under- 
stand and  obey  the  rules  and  understand  and 
know  the  meaning  of  signals;  see  that  material 
and  tools  are  safely  kept  and  properly  used;  keep 
record  of  time  worked  and  material  used,  and 
will  make  such  detailed  distribution  of  labor  and 
material  as  may  be  required.  When  watchmen 
are  employed,  they  must  properly  instruct  them 
in  relation  to  their  duties  and  know  that  they 
are  complied  with. 

an™ewatchle  1143.  Keep  themselves  supplied  with  a  copy 
of  current  Time  Tables,  and  be  thoroughly  familiar 
with  all  the  rules  and  regulations  thereon,  and 
with  the  time  of  all  trains  over  the  section  of  road 
on  which  they  are  working;  carefully  note  signals 
carried  by  trains;  no  notice  will  be  given  of  extra 
trains  that  may  be  running.  They  must  provide 
themselves  with  a  reliable  watch. and  when  pos- 
sible compare  time  daily  with  a  standard  clock 
or  with  watches  of  employes  who  are  required  to 
have  correct  time. 

236 


1144.     Foremen  in    bridge    and    track    work  Hand 

signaling. 

must  keep  themselves  supplied  with  the  following 
signals,  and  in  proper  condition  ready  for  immedi- 
ate use: 

12  torpedoes, 

6  fusees, 

3  red  flags, 

2  green  flags, 

3  combination  red  and  green  flags, 

4  green  lanterns, 
3  red  lanterns, 

2  white  lanterns. 

1145.  Foremen,  maintainers  and  repairmen  in  Hand 
signal,  telegraph  and  telephone  work  must  keep 
themselves  and  each  man  under  them,  who  may 

be  called  upon  to  do  flagging,  supplied  with  the 
following    signals   and   in  proper  condition  for 
immediate  use: 
12  torpedoes, 

6  fusees, 

1  red  flag, 

1  red  lantern, 

1  white  lantern. 

1146.  Before  work  on  track,   bridge  or  cul-workon 
vert  is  commenced  which  will  render  it  impassable  cuirfS 

ana  track. 

for  trains,  the  train  dispatcher  must  be  notified 
if  possible;  flagman  must  be  sent  in  both  direc- 
tions with  flagman's  signals  a  sufficient  distance 
to  insure  full  protection,  placing  two  torpedoes, 
and  when  necessary,  in  addition,  displaying 
lighted  fusees,  and  will  remain  there  until  recalled. 

237 


When  day  signals  cannot  be  plainly  seen,  owing 
to  weather  or  other  conditions,  night  signals  must 
also  be  used. 

In  placing  torpedoes  they  will  be  securely 
fastened  to  the  top  of  the  rail  on  the  engineman's 
side,  two  hundred  feet  apart,  and,  when  prac- 
ticable, not  closer  than  five  hundred  feet  from  a 
whistling  post. 

Flagman's  Signals: 

Day  signals — A  red  flag, 

Torpedoes  and 
Fusees. 
Night  signals — A  red  light, 

A  white  light, 
Torpedoes  and 
Fusees. 

1147.  When  track  is  in  bad  order  or  work  is 
to  be  done  which  will  render  it  unsafe  for  trains 
to  pass  at  their  usual  speed,  a  combination  red 
and  green  flag  by  day,  and  in  addition  a  red  and  a 
green  light  by  night,  must  be  placed  a  sufficient 
distance  to  insure  full  protection. 

A  green  flag  by  day,  and  in  addition  a  green 
light  by  night,  will  also  be  placed  at  the  point 
where  normal  speed  may  be  resumed. 

On  single  track  these  signals  must  be  placed  to 
the  right  of  the  track,  and  on  double  track  to  the 
left  of  the  track  in  the  direction  of  current  of 
traffic;  these  signals  will  not  be  placed  within  the 
home  signal  limits  or  near  the  interlocking  home 
signal  in  the  direction  of  current  of  traffic. 
238 


When  slow  speed  is  to  be  maintained  at  the  standard 

slow    boards. 

same  point  more  than  one  week,  standard  slow 
boards  should  be  set  up  instead  of  the  flags,  and 
standard  signal  lamps  used  instead  of  lanterns. 
Slow  speed  signals  must  be  set  on  two  standards 
at  least  four  feet  high. 

Report  to  the  proper   officer  at  once,  every  |gjg?|rded 
instance  when  signals  have  been  disregarded. 

1148.  Employes  in  the  bridge  and  building, 
water  service,  track,  signal,  telegraph,  or  other 
departments  having  occasion  to  obstruct  a  main 
track  in  any  way  while  engaged  in  doing  necessary 
work,  must,  before  doing  so,  see  that  protection 
is  given  as  per  Rule  99. 

1149.  They  shall  be  responsible  for  the  proper  Jj 
installation,  maintenance  and  safe  condition  of 
the  work  under  their  charge,  for  the  economical 
use  of  material  and  for  all  tools  entrusted  to  their 
charge,  and  when  tools  are  not  in  use  they  must 
be  locked  up   in  the   tool    car  or  box.     When 
relieved  they  must  turn  over  to  their  successor 
all  such  tools  and  material. 

1150.  No  material  of  any  description  must  be 
piled  or  left  within  six  feet  of  main  or  side  track, 
or  elsewhere,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  obstruct  the 
view  of  or  from  approaching  trains.     Rails  and 
other  material  must  not  be  left  scattered  about  the 
station  grounds.     Old  ties,  fencing,  draw  bars, 
spikes,  iron  work,  car  doors,  scraps  of  all  kinds 
found,  must  at  once  be  picked  up  and  disposed 
of  as  directed. 

239 


StatCu          1151.     They  must  not  make  any  change  in 
s£i5£tic     the  tracks  which  will  interfere  with  the  automatic 
signals  without  previous  arrangement,  nor  make 
any  iron  connections  of  the  rails  and  frogs.     They 
must    observe    the    working    of    the    automatic 
signals  and  report  promptly  any  defects  noticed. 
Broken  When  a  rail  is  broken  in  track  which  is  bonded 

for  track  circuit,  also  when  bond  wires  or  signal 
connections  are  found  broken,  or  it  is  necessary 
to  break  them,  the  signal  repairmen  must  be 
notified  immediately  so  that  normal  conditions 
can  be  restored  as  soon  as  possible. 

Accidents.  1152.  In  cases  of  accident  to  trains,  storms, 
or  other  causes  which  may  prevent  the  move- 
ment of  trains,  they  will  render  all  possible 
assistance  in  restoring  normal  conditions,  whether 
coming  under  their  particular  duties  or  otherwise, 
and  co-operate  with  other  departments  in  the 
protection  of  the  company's  property. 

inyestiKate  1153.  They  shall  investigate  and  report  all 
accidents  which  may  be  attributed  to  defects  in, 
or  result  in  damage  to,  property  under  their 
charge. 

Prescribed        1154.     They  shall  conform  to  the  prescribed 

standards.  . 

standards  and  plans  m  the  execution  of  their 
work.  They  will  not  permit,  except  by  proper 
authority,  experimental  trials  of  appliances  or 
devices  nor  give  out  information  of  the  result  of 
any  trial. 

Authority         1155.     They  must  not  make  or  permit  any 
gj™Jjseilt    permanent  rearrangement  of  or  changes  in  bridges, 

240 


building,  track,  signals,  interlocking  plants,  tel- 
egraph or  telephones  without  proper  authority. 

1156.  Track  jacks,   when  in  use,   must  be?arca£k 
placed  on  the  outside  of  the  rail,  and  must  always tooL}'  "*• 
be  protected  as  per  Rule  1145,  when  track  is 
obstructed.     The  use  of  track  jacks  between  the 

rails,  or  permitting  them  to  stand  on  the  track 
or  lie  between  the  rails  when  not  in  use,  is  posi- 
tively forbidden.  Tools,  iron,  ties  and  other 
material  should  not  be  brought  on  the  track  and 
allowed  to  remain  there,  except  when  needed  for 
immediate  use. 

1157.  They  must  not  permit  switch  keys  to  switch  ken. 
pass  out  of  their  possession,  and  must  personally 
attend  to  the  opening  and  closing  of  switches 
equipped  with  locks. 

1158.  (a).  Track  cars  must  be  used  only  in  Track  cars, 
company  service.     No  persons  other  than  em- 
ployes in  discharge  of  their  duties  will  be  per- 
mitted to  ride  upon  or  use  such  cars  except  in 
connection  with  railway  service  and  then  only  by 
permission  of  the  company  employe  in  responsible 
charge  of  the  car. 

(b).  When  track  cars  are  used,  lookout  must 
be  maintained  in  both  directions. 

(c).  Track  cars  moving  in  the  same  direction  on 
one  track  must  be  kept  at  least  five  hundred  (500) 
feet  apart,  must  not  be  attached  to  and  must 
not  follow  a  moving  train  closer  than  five  hun- 
dred (500)  feet. 

(d).  Should  a  torpedo  be  exploded  by  a  track 
car,  the  torpedo  must  be  immediately  replaced. 

241 


(e) .  Hand  cars  operated  in  multiple  main  track 
districts  must  in  all  cases  be  moved  against  the 
current  of  traffic  when  view  is  not  obstructed. 

(f).  When  a  track  car  is  run  after  dark,  a  white 
light  must  be  displayed  to  the  front  and  a  red 
light  to  the  rear  of  the  car. 

(g).  A  track  car  must  not  be  used  on  the  main 
track  when  view  is  not  clear  on  account  of  fog  or 
other  weather  conditions  unless  properly  protect- 
ed. It  must  not  be  taken  from  the  track  at 
public  or  private  crossings,  except  in  emergency. 

(h).  Track  cars  must  not  be  run  by  a  train 
standing  at  a  station  except  where  there  is  a 
fence  between  tracks. 

(i).  Motor  track  cars  must  not  be  run  by 
station  platforms  where  view  is  obstructed,  past 
men  working  on  track  or  after  dark  when  rails 
cannot  be  seen  for  at  least  two  hundred  (200) 
feet,  faster  than  will  allow  a  car  to  be  stopped  in 
fifteen  (15)  feet. 

(j).  When  approaching  a  highway,  the  view  of 
which  is  not  perfectly  clear,  the  speed  of  a  track 
car  must  be  regulated,  and  if  necessary  the  car 
stopped  before  reaching  the  crossing,  so  that  if 
a  team  or  automobile  reaches  the  crossing  at  the 
same  time,  an  accident  cannot  occur.  The  man 
operating  the  car  is  responsible  and  should  not 
accept  hand  signals  from  crossing  flagman  or 
any  one  else  stationed  at  or  near  the  crossing, 
but  should  have  absolute  knowledge  that  the- 
crossing  is  clear. 

242 


(k).  Track  cars  must  not  be  left  standing  on 
main  track  except  in  charge  of  a  sufficient  num- 
ber of  men  to  properly  handle  them.  When  not 
in  use,  they  shall  be  removed  from  track  and 
locked  or  otherwise  secured. 

(1).  A  person  operating  a  track  car  will  be  held 
responsible  for  all  accidents  and  must  protect 
himself  and  others  against  accidents.  He  must 
not  expect  others  to  protect  themselves. 

(m).  Take  no  risks.  In  case  of  doubt,  adopt 
the  safe  course.  It  is  better  to  be  delayed  than 
have  an  accident. 

(n).  Any  employe  who  notices  the  unau- 
thorized use  of  a  track  car  will  immediately 
report  same  to  the  Division  Superintendent. 

(o).  The  laws  or  regulations  of  a  state  or 
municipality  within  which  a  track  car  is  being 
operated  must  be  observed. 

1159.  (a).  Each  motor  car  should  be  operated 
by  one  person  as  much  as  practical,  who  should 
be  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  car. 

(b).  The  person  in  charge  of  a  car  must  know 
that  all  tools  and  materials  on  a  car  are  safely 
secured  and  kept  in  that  condition. 

(c).  Before  starting,  there  should  be  a  thorough 
understanding  as  to  what  part  each  person  is  to 
take  in  handling  the  car  should  an  emergency 
arise  necessitating  prompt  handling  of  the  car. 

(d).  A  motor  car  must  never  be  operated  under 
its  own  power,  unless  person  running  the  car  is 

243 


on  the  car.  Before  applying  power,  whether 
starting  or  running,  spark  lever  must  be  in  the 
retard  position. 

(e).  A  speeder  motor  car  must  not  be  run 
backwards  under  its  own  power. 

(f).  Keep  a  constant  lookout  for  dogs,  chickens, 
hogs,  or  other  animals,  also  for  objects  such  as 
stones  and  sticks  on  rail,  which  are  liable  to  be 
struck  and  derail  car. 

(g).  A  track  car  must  be  stopped  and  persons 
using  car  must  step  off  of  tracks  when  a  moving 
train  is  passing  on  adjacent  main  track. 

(h).  Cars  should  not  be  operated  faster  than 
a  walk  through  interlocking  plants  or  over  facing 
switches  and  facing  frogs,  and  should  be  run 
carefully  over  trailing  switches. 

(i).  A  track  car  must  not  be  run  to  exceed  ten 
(10)  miles  per  hour  on  curves,  or  more  than 
twenty  (20)  miles  per  hour  at  any  time. 

(j).  When  rails  are  slippery  due  to  wet  weather 
or  frost,  a  greater  distance  is  required  to  stop  a 
track  car  and  the  person  operating  the  car  should 
take  this  into  account. 

(k).  A  motor  track  car  must  never  be  used 
to  push  another  car.  When  used  to  move 
another  car,  the  motor  track  car  must  always  be 
ahead  and  securely  attached  close  to  the  car 
being  towed.  Slow  speed  must  be  maintained. 
No  one  shall  be  allowed  to  sit  with  legs  between 
such  cars  when  in  motion. 

244 


(1).  Do  not  adjust  track  car  while  it  is  in 
motion  except  that  adjustment  of  carburetor  is 
permitted. 

(m).  Each  gang  hand  car  must  be  provided 
with  a  hand  lever  attached  to  brake  on  at  least 
two  wheels.  Immediately  after  starting  a 
track  car,  brakes  must  be  tested  to  insure  that 
they  are  in  proper  working  condition.  Do  not 
use  brakes  suddenly  without  warning  to  every 
one  on  car. 

(n).  All  persons  riding  on  gang  hand  cars 
must  be  in  standing  position. 

(o).  Before  using  track  car  each  day,  inspect 
all  bolts,  nuts  and  cotters  to  see  that  all  are 
tight,  that  gasoline  tank,  feed  pipes  and  con- 
nections do  not  leak  and  that  brakes  are  in  good 
condition  and  adjustment.  Excessive  side  play 
in  boxes  must  not  be  allowed.  Each  box  must 
be  held  by  two  bolts  with  nuts  and  nutlocks. 
On  speeder  cars  there  must  be  two  bolts,  with 
nuts  and  nutlocks  fastening  guide  wheel  axle 
to  guide  arm.  Gauge  of  wheels  must  not  be  over 
four  feet  eight  inches  (4'  8")  or  less  than  four 
feet  seven  and  one  half  inches  (4'  7^")-  Track 
cars  must  not  be  used  with  any  part  worn  or 
broken  which  is  liable  to  cause  an  accident. 

(p).  All  speeder  motor  cars  must  be  equipped 
with  four  (4)  wheels;  the  large  wheels  must  have 
concave  tread.  Each  large  wheel  must  be  pro- 
vided with  a  Brake  and  both  operated  by  one 
lever;  the  brake  lever  handle  must  be  provided 

245 


with  a  hook  or  secure  means  to  insure  brake 
lever  clearing  moving  parts  of  engine  four  (4) 
inches. 

In  lining  up  wheels  of  speeder  motor  cars, 
front  large  wheel  should  be  very  slightly  turned 
towards  right  hand  rail  (except  on  those  cars  on 
which  no  adjustment  is  provided);  rear  large 
wheel  very  slightly  away  from  right-hand  rail; 
front  small  wheel  away  from  left-hand  rail  and 
rear  small  wheel  parallel  to  rail.  When  lined  up 
properly,  large  front  wheel  will  hug  right-hand 
rail  when  car  is  pushed  forward  by  hand,  and  if 
car  is  shoved  over  so  that  small  wheel  hugs  left- 
hand  rail,  the  car  will  return  itself  so  that  large 
front  wheel  hugs  right-hand  rail.  See  that  large 
front  wheel  hugs  rail  before  starting. 

(q).  The  use  of  a  track  car  with  any  other 
motor  and  equipment  than  that  regularly  in- 
stalled thereon  will  not  be  permitted  without 
special  authority. 

(r).  Gasoline  must  not  be  handled  near  a 
lighted  lantern  or  any  other  flame. 

(s).  Do  not  get  off  car  while  it  is  in  motion. 
In  no  case  shall  a  man  get  on  a  car  that  is  in 
motion  from  in  front. 

(t).  Track  cars  must  be  shipped  on  trains  as 
little  as  possible.  The  tanks  must  be  thoroughly 
drained  before  loading  for  shipment. 


246 


TRACK  FOREMEN. 


1180.  The    track     foremen    report     to    the  Report  to. 
road-master. 

They  have  charge  of  the  repairs  on  their  section,  ^ftponsi- 
and  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and  safe 
condition  of  the  track. 

1181.  They  must  assist  in  the  work  personally ;  Duties, 
go  themselves,  or  send  a  reliable  and  competent 
man,  over  their   sections   at   least   once   daily; 
carefully  note  the  condition  of  track,  road-bed, 
bridges,    culverts,    fences,    cattle    guards,    etc., 
and  know  that  everything  is  safe  for  the  passage 

of  trains. 

1182.  See  that  track  is  in  proper  line  and  Prop*?  line, 
surface,  is  full  spiked  to  correct  gauge,  and  that 

every  joint  is  full  bolted  and  kept  tight. 

1183.  They  must  see  that  all  switches  are  in  switches. 

frogs,  guard 

perfect  order;  that  frogs,  guard-rails  and  switch- raUs- etc- 
rails  are  properly  blocked  and  spaces  in  planked 
crossings  kept  clean;  that  switches,  derails  and 
pipe  lines  in  interlocking  plants  are  kept  clean  and 
well  drained;  that  derails  and  signals  connected 
to  and  protecting  outlying  switches  are  working 
properly. 

1184.  They  must  see  that  the  right-of-way  cattu 
fences  and  cattle-guards  are  kept  in  repair,  and 
that  gates  and  bars  are  closed.    In  any  case  where 

247 


parties  are  in  the  habit  of  leaving  gates  and  bars 
open,  notice  of  the  fact  must  be  given  the  road- 
master. 

Fires.  1185.     Keep  a  careful  look-out  for  fires  along 

the  right-of-way,  and,  if  possible,  prevent  its 
spreading,  and  damage  or  destruction  of  the 
Company's  or  adjoining  property.  During  dry 
weather  no  fires  must  be  started  unless  there  is 
sufficient  force  to  keep  them  under  control.  When 
a  fire  is  discovered  which  appears  to  have  been 
started  by  an  engine,  a  report  should  be  immedi- 
ately made  to  the  nearest  master  mechanic,  or 
round-house  foreman,  by  wire  and  on  postal-card 
form  786.  In  every  case  of  damage,  either  to  the 
Company's  property  or  the  property  of  others,  a 
report  must  be  madfc  to  the  roadmaster  on  form 
76.  If  property  destroyed  does  not  belong  to 
the  Company,  the  owner  should  be  requested  to 
make  a  statement  of  loss  on  form  76-A,  which 
must  also  be  forwarded  to  the  roadmaster. 

and6  d£-k  H86.  Investigate  every  case  of  damage  to  live 
position.  stock  and  make  a  full  report  to  the  roadmaster  on 
form  1229.  When  stock  is  killed  or  injured  notify 
the  owner,  and  if  not  taken  charge  of  within  a 
reasonable  time,  bury  the  carcass  and  dispose  of 
the  hide  to  the  best  advantage;  notify  the  owner 
of  the  action  taken,  sending  the  required  reports 
promptly  to  the  roadmaster,  and  the  money  to 
the  local  treasurer. 

Track  foremen  are  prohibited  from  arbitrating 
or  agreeing  on  appraisers  to  determine  the  amount 
of  the  loss. 

248 


1187.  Whenever  violent  wind  or  rainstorms  ™j;$orm, 
occur,  or  in  case  of  sudden  rise  of  streams  at  night hlgh  watw< 
as  well  as  during  the  day;  trackmen  are  required 

to  carefully  examine  the  condition  of  the  track, 
bridges,  culverts,  etc.,  and  if  not  considered 
entirely  safe,  flag  approaching  trains.  A  report 
must  always  be  made  to  the  chief  train  dis- 
patcher by  wire  after  such  inspection,  stating 
the  exact  conditions. 

1188.  Examine  the  line  wires  each  day  and  Examine 
if  they  are  crossed  or  obstructed,  repair  tempo- 
rarily, when  possible,  and  report  the  conditions 

to  the  chief  train  dispatcher.  Examine  each  day 
the  whips  and  warning  guards  for  overhead 
structures,  repair  when  possible,  and  report 
defects  to  the  road  master. 

1189.  They  will  pick  up  any  property  found  care  of 
on  the  right-of-way,  whether  lost  from  passing 
trains  or  not,  and  deliver  it  to  the  agent  at  the 
nearest  station,  making  a  report  by  letter  to  the 
road  master. 

1190.  Should  persons  be  found  on  the  right-of-  Persons 

,  „  ,.    .  unable  to 

way  who  are  not  in  a  safe  or  proper  condition  to  g^Jveg 
care  for  themselves,  they  must  be  placed  in  charge 
of  the  proper  authorities  or  removed  to  a  place  of 
safety  from  personal  injury. 


249 


INDEX. 


Rule  No. 

Abbreviations 223 

Absence  from  duty 709 

Accidents,  reporting 

701,  800, 801, 802, 803, 804, 805, 806, 807,  1152, 1153 

Acknowledge  signals 14,  29 

Advertising  matter 739,  861,  862 

Air  brake  rules. . , 1070  to  1119 

Any  object  waived 13 

Block  Signaling  (automatic) :   501a  to  512a 

Broken  rails  or  bond  wires 510b 

Cross-over  (use  of) 511,  512,  512a 

Lights  on  Signals 506 

Signals  out  of  order 510,  510a 

Signals,  what  they  govern. . : 505,  508 

Stop  signal  (observation) 509,  509c 

Stop  and  proceed  signal  (observation) 509 

Block  Signaling  (manual) 302a  to  374 

Admitting  train  and  reporting 

317,  317a,  317b,  318,  319,  320,  321,  322,  323 

Authority  to  occupy  block 362e 

Care  of  Station,  etc 335 

Circuits  (work  through  and  ground) 340a 

Closing  office ,341,    341a,    342,    373 

Communicating  code 316,  316a 

Communication  cut  off 332,  332a 

Cross-over  and  switching 

327,  327a,  327b,  334,  361,  366,  366a,  366b 

Delays 372, 372a 

District  defined  in  time  table 305a,  374 

Hand  signalling  appliances 333 

Intermediate  siding 317a,  362c 

Lights  in  block  stations 336 

Lights  (when  displayed) 337 

251 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Movement  against  current  traffic 

D152b,    334,    361,    366a,    366b 

Normal  indication  of  signals 311 

Observe  passing  trains 321 

Obstruction  in  block 325,   370 

Office  closed  at  irregular  hour 343a 

Office  opened  at  irregular  hour 306,  341 

Office  opened  and  closed 340,  341,  342,  343,  373,  814 

Orders  for  train 330,  330a 

Record  of  train  movement 315,  315a,  315b 

Signals  (how  to  operate) 312 

Signals  (out  of  order) 312,  331 

Signals  (observe  indication) 313 

Signals  (repair  and  change) 314 

Signals  (what  they  govern) 305,  305a 

Stop  signal  disregarded 338,  339 

Stop  signal  overrun 338,  339 

Stop  train  after  engine  by  signal 329,  329a 

Signalman  absent ' 372a 

Telephone  code 316,  316a 

Train  moving  against  traffic 334,  361,  366b 

Train  parting .324,  328,  367,  368,  369 

Train  separating  and  recoupling 328,  364,  369 

Train  without  markers 323 

Block  Signaling  (time  spacing) 380  to  383 

Record  of  train  movement 383 

Spacing 91,  91a,  380,  381,  383 

Bridges 101,  lOla,  lOlb,  108,  701,  705,  706 

Bulletins 83d 

Cars 

Bad  order 957,  960 

Bunk  cars  on  sidings 26b 

Ahead  of  engine 24,   103,  103a,  716 

Connected  by  communicating  signals 25 

Door  instructions 730,  891 

Examination  of 729 

Economy  in  use 735 

Flats 729 

252 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

FreigKt  handled  in  passenger  train 908 

Hauled  behind  caboose 19a 

Inspection  of 26,  26a 

Laborer 26b 

Loading  (MCB) 744 

Log 729 

Oil 729 

Passenger  (switched) 103a,  1105 

Persons  not  allowed  in 737 

Placing  at 728,  729 

Position  in  train. 729 

Poultry 729 

Repairmen  signals 26,  26a 

Repaired 26,  26a 

Steam  heat  instructions 743 

Stock 729 

Tanks 729 

Track  and  motor 1158,  1159 

Ventilation 730 

Vestibules  and  traps 931,  938,  940 

Wooden  platform 729 

Clearance  cards  (use  of) 83a,  83b,  91b 

Clearance  (track 734,  1150 

Clear  (time  of  train) 86,  87,  88,  89,  90,  91,  91a 

Condition  (passing  trains) 700 

Crossing  gates 33, 33a,  33b 

Cross-over 327,  327a,  327b,  334,  361,  366,  366a,  366b 

Culverts lOla,  108 

Damaged  freight 725 

Delays 720 

Detouring  trains 83b,  718,   719 

Defects  (reporting) 700,  701 

Diverting  trains D152,  D152a,  D152b,  D152c 

Dismissals 708 

Duty  of  employes. 
Baggagemen  (train)    920  to  926 

253 


INDEX-Continued 

Rule  No. 

Brakemen  (passenger) 930  to  941 

Brakemen   (freight)   1000  to    1005 

Conductors  (passenger) 723,  739,  900  to  915 

Conductors  (freight) 723,  725,  739,  950  to  972 

Enginemen 1040  to   1052 

Firemen 1060  to  1065 

Foremen,  Bridge  and  Building 734,  1140  to  1159 

Foremen,  Engine  House 1020,  1021 

Line  repairmen 840,  1140  to  1159 

Operators 810  to  830 

Signal  repairmen 1140  to  1159 

Station  agents 734,  737,  738,  739,  741,  850  to  873 

Yardmasters 890  to  895 

Track  foremen 

700  to  707,  734, 1140  to  1159, 1180  to  1190 

Engine. 

Backing  up 103b 

Bell  and  whistle 

14, 14q,  14r,  30, 30a,  30b,  31, 31a,  32,  721,  1050 

Connecting  by  communicating  signals 25 

Cutting  off 955 

Display  headlight 17, 17a,  D17, 18 

Escape  of  steam 1049 

Flagman's  signals 1042 

Hauled  in  trains 966,  ^67 

Pushing  cars 24,  103,  103a,  716 

Not  to  stand  near  crossing 1049 

Riding  on  footboard  and  pilot 712,  713,  714 

Switch  speed  of 103b 

Examination  of  Employes 707 

Explosives 907 

Freight  cars  handled  in  passenger  train 908 

Fires  (action  and  reporting) 704,  1185,  1047 

Footboards  of  engines 712,  713,  714 

Fusees 11,  lla 

Fog 101,    lOle,    lOlf 

Gambling 739 

254 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Games  (playing) 742 

Headlight  (when  displayed) 17,  D17,  17a,  18 

Highway  crossings  blocked 860,  955,  956 

Highway  crossing  precaution lOlf,  103,  103a,  721,  724 

High  water  (action  and  reporting) . . .  101,  lOla,  lOlb,  705, 706 

Indicators  (caboose) 19c 

Injuries  (care  and  reporting) 800  to  807 

Inspection  of 

Bridges. 700,  701 

Cars .26,  26a,  728, 1117 

Interlocking.  ,-., 617,  621 

Tracks 701,  705,  706 

Trains  on  road 26,  26a,  700 

Trains  and  cars  in  yard 26,  26a,  728,  1117 

Trains  (passenger) 900,  902,  903 

Watches 1  to3b 

Interlocking 

Care  of  plant 630 

Cold  weather 618,   619,  667a 

Defects 622,  623,   624,  625,  625a 

Delays  and  detentions 668 

Detectors 616 

Discontinue  use  of  plant 629 

Hand    signalling 629a,    663,    663a,  669 

Lamps  (when  lighted) 632 

Levers  (how  operated) 612,  617,  618,  619 

Lights  (use  of  in  plants) 631 

Normal  indication  of  signals 611,  614 

Observe  signal  indications 621 

Observe  passing  trains 626 

Obstruct  plant 726 

Plant  out  of  service 663b 

Repairmen 681,  682,  683,  684,  685 

Repairs  and  changes 622,  623,  624,  625,  625a,  663b 

Reverse  movement 669,  670 

Route  changed 615,  616a,  661 

Route  set  to  avoid  delays 613 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Sand  over  plants 667 

Signals,  what  they  govern 605 

Signals,  out  of  order 620 

Signaling  (appliances  on  hand) 628 

Snow  periods 619 

Stations  (who  may  enter) 634,  737 

Stop  signal  overrun 633,  662 

Train  parted 627,  664,  665,  666 

Trains  not  to  obstruct 726 

Keys 710,  711, 1157 

Legal  instructions 736,  741 

Lights,  platform  and  station 870 

Live  Stock  and  Disposition 1186 

Lose  rights 82,  220 

Lost  articles 912 

Maintenance  rules  (general) 1140  to  1159 

Markers. 

Engine 19,  19a,  19b 

Trains 19,  19a,  19b,  D19 

Meals 913 

Meeting  points 88,  89,  90 

Motor  and  track  cars 1158,  1159 

Movement  of  trains 82  to  D152c 

Movement  of  trains  by  train  orders 201  to  223 

Movement  of  train  by  telephone 206,  241,  242,  243,  244 

Movement  of  train  against  the  current  of  traffic 

D152c,  334,  361,  362e,  366b 

News  Agents 910 

Night  signals  (when  displayed) 9,  337,  632 

Operators  transfer 341a,  811 

Opposite  track  obstructed,  D151,  D152,  D152a,  362e,  366, 366a 

Passenger  trains  discharging  passengers 

106,    106a,     106b,    D106 

Passengers. 

Carried  on  freight  trains 729,  732,  733,  953 

Intoxicated 905 

256 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Refusing  to  pay  fare 906 

Requiring  care 740,  900 

Protection  of  trains 

98a,  99,  99a,  99b,  99c,  100,  101,  lOla,  D102,  722,  723 

Reading  on  duty 742 

Re-employment 708 

Register  check 83,  83c 

Repairman's  signal 26 

Repair  track 26a 

Retainers , 721,  1102 

Running  Switches 955 

Scales 727 

Schedules. 

Arrive  in  advance  of 92 

In  effect 82 

Meeting    points.., 88,    89,    90,    90a 

Trains  passing  one  another 85,  D85,  94 

Sections. 

Operation  of 95,  95a,  D95,  96 

Pass  and  run  ahead 85,  D85 

Siding  (approaching  and  how  used) 98,  98a 

Signals. 

Acknowledgment  of  . . A 29 

At  station  (hand  appliances  for) '. 869 

Audible 14 

Automatic  block 501  to  519 

Block 305,   305a,   363 

Caution  on  track lOh,   lOld 

Classification 20  to   23a 

Color 8,  10 

Communicating 16,  25 

Crossing  gate 33,  33a,  33b 

Day  and  night,  when  displayed 9,  337,  632 

Disappearance  of » . . .       7a 

Displayed  by  train 17  to  24,  95,  D95 

Disregarded 338,  339,  632,  633,  1147 

Engineman  aaid  fireman  repeat 34 

257 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Engine  and  motor 14 

Flagman's.  .35,  99,  333,  628,  926,  1042,  1144,  1145,  1146 

Flag  stops 28 

Front  of  car  being  pushed 24 

Hand  appliances  for 7 

Hand  flag  and  lamp 12 

Imperfectly  displayed 27,  27a 

Interlocking 601a  to  685 

Know  indication 98b 

Location  in  giving 7a 

Manual  block 302a  to  374 

Marker  lamp .x lOg 

Night,  when  displayed 9,  337,  632 

Observation  of 34,  lOle,  700,  721,  722 

Protect  laborers  on  siding 26b 

Repairman 26,  26a 

Resume  Normal  Speed r lOh,  lOld,  1147 

Slow  speed lOh,  lOld,  1147 

Steam  heat 743 

Taken  down  before  other  section  arrives 96 

Time  spacing 380  to  383 

To  start  train 84,  1044 

Train 17  to  24 

Train  order  semaphore,  etc 221,  221b,  302a,  302c 

Use  of 27  to  34 

Visible 8;  10,  12 

Whistle 14,  31,  31a.  32,  721,  1050 

Slow  speed  rules lOh,  lOlc,  lOld,  lOle,  lOlf,  1147 

Solicitors 739 

Standard  clock 3 

Standard  time 1  to  3b,  828 

Steam  heat 743 

Stock,  care  of 729,  731,  732 

Storms 101,  lOla,  lOlb,  lOle,  lOlf,  108,  705, 706 

Superiority  of  trains 71,  72 

Supplies. 

Caboose 972 

258 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Coaches 915 

Baggage  car 915 

Engine 1052 

Suspensions 708 

Switches. 

Defective 104c 

Engr.  and  Condr.  (report  when  out  of  order) 702 

How  left  and  who  responsible  for 104,  104b 

Targets,  indication  of 104d 

Trainman  stand  twenty  feet  away 104b 

Train  passing 104b 

Switching  over  street  or  public  crossing . .  103,  103a,  721,  724 

Switching  (safety  first) 712,  713,  714,  715,  724 

Telegraph. 

Instructions : 738 

Movement  of  trains  by 201  to  244 

Office  closed 244,  306,  341,  341a,  342,  373,  814 

Office  opened 306,  340,  340a,  343,  373 

Students 829 

Telephone. 

Instructions 738 

Movement  of  trains  by 206,  241,  242,  243,  244 

Station  closed , 244 

Time  tables 4  to  6 

Tools. 

Caboose 972 

Coaches 915 

Baggage  car 915 

Engine ' 1052 

Torpedoes,  use  of 15,  99,  99a 

Track  and  Motor  cars 1158,  1159 

Track  (condition  of) lOh,  108,  700,  705,  706 

Transmitting  orders 210,  210a,  211 

Trains. 

Approaching  end  of  double  tracks  and  junctions 98 

Approaching  station  where  passengers  are  being  dis- 
charged  106,  106a,  D106 

259 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Approaching  meeting  points 90 

Approaching  stations  and  sidings 98a 

Arrive  in  advance  of  schedule 92 

At  stations 98a 

Backing  up 716,  1079,  1091,  1093,  1106,  1110 

Check  register 83,  83c,  D83 

Clearance  time 86,  87,  88,  89,  90,  91,  91a 

Detoured 83b,  718,  719 

Disabled 94,  94a,  D94 

Diverted D152,  D152a,  D152b,  D152c 

Get  start  signal 84 

Identify  at  meeting  points 90a 

Leave  initial  station 83,  83a,  83c,  D83 

Lose  rights 82 

Make  up ,  729,  891,  964, 

966,  1072,  1073,  1074,  1086,  1093,  1103,  1105,  1118 

Movement  of 82  to  D152c 

Movement  in  yards 93,  93a 

Moving  under  slow  speed  (temporarily) lOld 

Note  condition  (while  passing) 700 

Orders 201  to  243 

Orders  relayed 241,  242,   243 

Parting 102,  D102,  324,  328,  367,  368,  369 

Passenger  switched 1105 

Passing  another 85,   D85 

Passing  passenger  discharging  passengers 106,  D 106 

Protection 98a,  99, 

99a,  99b,  99c,  100,  101,  lOla,  723,  934,  1004,  1148 

Report  departure  of  train 222,  319 

Register 83,   83b,   83c,   D83 

Run  ahead  of  another 85,  D85 

Run  without  orders 97,  97a,  D97,  D97a 

Safety  of  (responsibility) 105 

Sections  pass  and  run  ahead 85,  D85 

Spacing 91,  91a 

Superiority 71,  72 

Taking  coal  and  water  (engine  cut  off) . 1051 

Take  siding 208e 

260 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Use  of  siding 98 

Work 716 

Train  orders. 

Acknowledgment  of   212,  212a 

Brief,  etc 201 

Compare 210,  211 

Continue  in  effect 220,  220c 

Delivery  by  train 217 

Delivery  by  Operator 210,  211,  211a 

Designation  of  train 206 

Foreign  engine 206a 

'How  numbered 203 

How  transmitted 207,  210,  210a,  211 

Intermediate 208a,   208c,   208e 

Line  failure 214 

Movement  of  trains 201 

Not  accept 219 

Office  in  Interlocking  Plant 221b 

Office  open  irregular 221a,  306 

Read 935, 1003, 1062 

Record  of 205,   209,   216 

Relaying 241,    242,    243 

Restricting  rights 208a,  208b,  208c,  208d,  208e 

Side  track  (meeting  point  changed) 208e 

Signature  to 210,  210a,  211 

Stop  signals 221 

To  whom  addressed 202,  204,  208,  208a 

Transmission  by  phone 206 

When  complete 213 

When  holding 214 

Turn  tables 703 

Unloading  freight 725 

Under  control 90,  93,  98,  98a 

Unnecessary  use  of  Bell  or  Whistle 32 

U.  S.  Mail  (instructions  in  handling) 858,  872,  873,  923 

Vestibules  and  traps 931,  938,  940 

Watch  inspection 2  to  3b 

261 


INDEX— Continued 

Rule  No. 

Watch  comparison 2  to  3b 

Where  schedule  time  applies 5 

Whistling. 

Action  when  no  response 14r 

Duration  and  intervals 14q 

Signals  displayed 14,  D14 

Unnecessary  use  of 32 

When  not  to  sound 31a,  32,  1050 

When  to  sound 31 

Water  high 101,  lOla,  lOlb,  705,  706 

Work  train 716 

Yard  limits 93,  93a 

Zero  weather lOlb,  lOlc 


262 


mv&mbiiWK#!^^ 


Is 


'yyZ 


n 


ffivbMm; 

ff*iP#& 


nmm 


IM18S703 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


